MCOM Commissioning Manual PDF

Complete Solution for Motor Protection
INSTRUCTION MANUAL
Complete Solution for Motor Protection
The content of this publication is subject to change

without notice. Larsen & Toubro Limited reserves the
right to make product-improvement changes which
may or may not be re ected in this publication. Larsen
& Toubro Limited is not responsible for any inadvertent
admissions, omissions, or errors. Larsen & Toubro
Limited assumes no liability for damages arising out of,
or in connection with, the application or use of any
product or application described herein.
Rev. C
Released Date - September, 2016
L&T Electrical & Automation

Electrical Systems & Equipment
Head of ce
7C, TC II, Tower B, L&T Business Park,
L&T Gate No. 5, Saki Vihar Road, Powai,
Mumbai 400 072, India
© 2016 Larsen & Toubro Limited. All rights reserved.
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C

CONTENTS
1.0 PREFACE 01
Manual Overview 02
Version 02
Purpose of This Manual 02
Safety and General Information 02
Conventions and Nomenclature 02
Conventions 02
Nomenclatures 03
2.0 INTRODUCTION 05
About the Relay 06
Reasons for Motor Protections 06
Product Overview 07
Relay Main unit 07
Status of LED Indication 07
Current Module (CM) 08
Display unit 08
DIO Expansion unit 08
LED Indication on expansion unit 09
MCOMP Order Codes 09
Getting Started 11
3.0 SPECIFICATIONS 12
General 13
Dimensions 14
Type Tests 15
Certi cations 15
Environmental Conditions 15
Relay Elements 16
Metering 18
Monitoring 18
4.0 INSTALLATION 19
Overview 20
Mechanical Installation 20
Dimensions 20
Main unit Dimensions 20
CM 1 Dimensions 20
CM 2-5 Dimensions 21
DIO Expansion Module Dimensions 21
Display Dimensions 21
Product Identi cation Label 22
Mounting 22
Relay Mounting 22
CM Mounting 22
Display Mounting 23
DIO Expansion Module Mounting 23

CONTENTS
Electrical Installation 24
Relay Main Unit Wiring 25
3 Phase Voltage Connections 26
3-Phase Current Connections 26
Con guration Port Connection 27
RTD/PTC and Analog O/P Connections 28
Communication Port Connection 28
Auxiliary Power Supply Connection 30
Digital Input Connections 30
Digital Output Connections 31
Current Module (CM) Wiring 31
Display Wiring 33
Expansion Unit Wiring 35
5.0 METERING AND MONITORING 37

Overview 38
Metering 38
Current Based Metering 38
RMS Line Current 38
Earth Fault Current 38
Average RMS Current 38
Thermal Capacity 38
Current Unbalance 38
Voltage Based Metering 38
RMS Line Voltage 38
RMS Phase Voltage 38
Average RMS Voltage 38
Frequency 38
Power and Energy Based Metering 39
Power 39
Energy 39
Power Factor 39
Miscellaneous Parameter 39
Temperature 39
Digital Input/Output Status 39
COMPlogic output Status 39
Monitoring 39
Motor Speci c Data Monitoring 39
Phase Sequence 39
Motor Starting Time 39
CM Type 40
Number of Starts 40
Number of Stops 40
Motor Run Hours 40
Total Motor Run Hours 40
Starting Peak Current 40
Annunciations 40

CONTENTS
6.0 PROTECTIONS 41
Overview 42
Thermal Protection 43
Overload (49) 43
Current Based Protection 46
Over current Protection (50P) 46
Under current Protection (37) 46
Current unbalance Protection (46) 47
Earth Fault Protection (50N or 50SG) 47
Locked Rotor Protection (50LR) 48
IDMT Overcurrent (51P/51N) 48
Phase Loss Protection (47A) 49
Voltage Based Protection 49
Over voltage Protection (59) 49
Under voltage Protection (27) 50
Voltage unbalance Protection (47) 50
Phase reversal Protection (47B) 51
Frequency Based Protection 51
Under frequency Protection (81L) 51
Over frequency Protection (81H) 51
Advanced Features 51
Re-acceleration (27LV) 51
Temperature Monitoring 53
Maximum Number of Starts Protection (66) 54
Fail to Stop Protection 54
Interlock 1 to 12 54
Communication Failure Monitoring 54
Excessive Start Time Protection 54
Analog Input Monitoring 54
7.0 COMMUNICATION 56
Overview 57
Communication Interface 57
Communication Protocol 57
Modbus RTU 57
Supported Modbus Function Codes 58
Modbus RTU Settings 58
Modbus memory map 58
Pro bus DP 58
Pro bus Settings 59
Pro bus memory map 59
Modbus TCP/IP 59
Modbus TCP/IP Settings 59
Modbus TCP/IP Memory Map 60
Parameter Mapping 60
Status Word 62
Communication Architecture 62
Modbus Architecture 62
Pro bus Architecture 62

CONTENTS
8.0 SETTINGS 64
Overview 65
Setting Parameters 65
System Setting Parameters 65
Protection Setting Parameters 69
Digital Input Output Setting Parameters 69
Basic Digital Input/Output 69
DIO Expansion Module 69
Digital Input Settings 70
Digital Output Settings 72
Analog Output Settings 73
Communication Setting Parameters 74
COMPlogic Setting Parameters 74
COMPlogic Modules 74
Truth Table 74
Signal Conditioner 74
Counters 75
Timers 76
List of logical Inputs 77
Relay Con guration 78
Relay Con guration through the Display 78
Relay Con guration through MCOMP suite 80
Relay Con guration through Communication 82
Examples of Relay Selection and Basic Settings using
Motor data 82
Case 1: 82
Solution: 82
Case 2: 83
Solution: 83
Setting Sheet 85
System Settings 85
Protection Settings 87
Communication Settings 91
DIO Settings (Digital Input/Output) 91
Parameter Mapping Settings 115
COMPlogic Settings 115
9.0 USER INTERFACE 119

Overview 120
MCOMP Suite Interface 120
Installation Guide 120
.NET Framework 3.5 Service Pack installation 120
Multi-version MCOMP Suite Installation 122
MCOMP Suite Installation 123
Operation Guide 124
MCOMP Suite Con guration 124
Monitoring Mode 125
Con guration Mode 132
Display Interface 144
Operation Guide 144
Metering 145

CONTENTS
Settings 146
View Records 147
Commands 148
Display Settings 148
Connect to PC 149
10.0 TESTING AND TROUBLESHOOTING 150

Overview 151
Testing 151
Connection Setup Requirement 151
Metering testing 151
Phase current and voltage: 151
Power, Energy & Power factor: 151
Protection Testing 151
Troubleshooting 152
Special Commands 153
Inhibit Status 154
Motor Stop Cause 154
Memory Maps 156

Overview 157
A] Modbus RTU Memory Map 157
Trip Record Table 169
Event Record Table 172
Table A-3. Event Record Cause Table 172
B] Pro bus memory map 176
Cyclic Data 176
Data Representation 180
Data Modules available in GSD le 189
Acyclic Data 190
C] Modbus TCP/IP Memory Map 192
Application Notes 218

Overview 218
A] Starter Application 218
DOL Starter 218
RDOL Starter 219
STAR/DELTA Starter 220
B] Non Motor Load Application 221
C] Re-acceleration Application 221
D] 3P-3W, 3P-4W Application 222
E] Two Phase Voltage Inputs (R and Y phase input)
Application 223
F] Winding Heating Application 223
G] Analog Output Application 223
H] Pro bus Communication Application 224
I] Protection Function Application 227
Thermal Overload Case Study 227
Locked Rotor Protection 229
J] Watchdog Application 229
K] Single Phase Motor Application 231

PREFACE
MCOMP User Manual - REV. C 1

PREFACE
Manual Overview Safety and General Information

The MCOMP Instruction Manual provides complete information This manual uses following safety statements:
necessary to install, operate, and maintain the MCOMP Relay and
its accessory components. Immediate Hazard.
An overview of each section of this manual is as follows: SEVERE personal injury or death WILL result.
DANGER
Preface: Describes the manual organization, Safety & General
Hazards or unsafe practices.
Information and conventions & nomenclatures used in this
SEVERE personal injury or death MAY result.
manual. WARNING
Introduction: Provides a brief overview of the product and the
Hazards or unsafe practices.
manual.
MINOR personal injury or damage to products or
Speci cations: Lists the Relay technical speci cations. CAUTION property MAY result.
Installation: Describes mechanical installation and electrical
IMPORTANT Essential advisory information.
wiring of the Relay.
Metering and Monitoring: Describes the operation and NOTE Additional or explanatory information.
calculation of each metering functions.
Protection: Describes the operating characteristics of each
protection element provided in the Relay.
Conventions and Nomenclature
Communication: Describes communication interface and
Conventions
protocols supported by the Relay.
In this manual,
Settings: Describes the different setting parameters meaning
with its use and how to enter settings into the relay. It also de nes Relay refers to MCOMP Main Unit
the setting sheet describing all the settings available in the relay. Display Unit refers to MCOMP Display Unit
User Interface: Describes how to con gure the Relay through CM refers to MCOMP Current Module
local interface using MCOMP Suite and the Display.
Expansion unit refers to add-on DIO/AI unit
Testing and Troubleshooting: Describes the common problems
encountered during the Relay testing and various troubleshooting
techniques.
Version
This is revision C release of the manual by Larsen & Toubro Ltd.
Purpose of This Manual

This manual intends to help the users of the MCOMP Relay, to
operate, maintain and troubleshoot the device. It may be used by
following users:
Design and Planning Engineers
System Integrators
Maintenance Engineers

PREFACE
Nomenclatures
Following are the different Nomenclature and their descriptions

used in this Manual.
Nomenclatures Descriptions
CAT Category
CBCT Core Balance Current Transformer
CM Current Module
CRC Cyclic Redundancy Check
DCS Distributed Control System
DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol
DI Digital Input
DIN German Institute for Standardization
DIO Digital Input/Output
DO Digital Output
DOL Direct On Line
DP Decentralized Peripherals
DTE Data Terminal Equipment
EEPROM Electrically Erasable and Programmable Read Only Memory
EWS Engineering Work Station
FS System Frequency
GSD General Station Description
GMT Greenwich Mean Time
IEF Set Value for Earth Fault Current
IFLC Full Load Current
IOC Instantaneous Over Current
IR Running Current
ISET Set Value for Over load curve
LCS Local Control System
LED Light Emitting Diode
LRC Longitudinal Redundancy Check
LSB Least Significant Bit
MFLA Multiple of Full Load Current
MSB Most Significant Bit
OLED Organic Light Emitting Diode
PTC Positive Temperature Coefficient
PWR/COMM Power/Communication
RDOL Reverse Direct On Line
RMS Root Mean Square
Table 1-1: Nomenclature and Description

PREFACE
RTD Resistance Temperature Detector

RTU Remote Terminal Unit
SCADA Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition
SNTP Simple Network Time Protocol
TCC Trip Curve Characteristics
TCP/IP Transfer Control Protocol/Internet Protocol
TM Thermal Memory
Table 1-1: Nomenclature and Description
Suggestions for Improving this Manual

For any feedback to improve this manual and its contents, kindly contact at ESE-CMT@LNTEBG.com.

INTRODUCTION

INTRODUCTION
About the Relay
MCOMP is designed as a reliable building block for Motor Control are designed to monitor key parameters of the motor to alert
Centres (MCCs) and a product designed to provide complete the operator of a condition of outage or damage.
motor protection. It covers conventional & advanced motor
protection, metering and annunciation in MCC feeders into
single, easy to con gure, compact communicating module with a Varying Starting Condition
optional OLED Display. The MCOMP is used as a protection The protection controller must be able to differentiate
controller for Low Voltage Contactor Controlled Motor Starter between starting condition and running condition.
Feeders.
During starting condition, a LV motor (up to 300 KW) has
starting current of about 550-700 % of its full load current,
Reasons for Motor Protections with a starting time usually ranging from 1 to 10 seconds.
Electric motors are the major operands of any industry. These It should be able to monitor pre-start conditions of the motor
motors come in with a wide variety of ratings, types and to prevent starting of motor under unfavorable conditions like
applications. Depending on the criticality of the process or inadequate thermal capacity available and voltage
application, the motor protection is selected. unhealthiness.
Motor Protection is required for the following reasons: It should check the pre-start, starting and running conditions
of the motor completely for safe operation of the motor.
MCOMP as a Microprocessor Equipped Intelligent Controller,
Varying Input Voltages and Load Currents
allows a user to set parameters of the motor according to the
Motor is a rotating equipment and its performance is application and process requirements.
dependent on the availability of tolerable levels of input
Based on the instantaneous measurement of the parameters,
voltages and variable loads. Faults occur when either of these
MCOMP monitors different conditions of the motor as shown in
parameters uctuates. Therefore, motor protection controllers
Table 2-1.
Condition of Motor Possible Irregularities Action by MCOMP

Under-voltage on the supply side. Prevents starting of the motor on under-voltage lockout.
Not cooled enough for next start. Prevents starting of the motor until the thermal memory
(thermal capacity) falls below a certain value.
Pre-start: Before the
motor starts (inhibit Frequent starting / Number of starts per defined time Prevents starting of the motor until a inhibit period is elapsed.
conditions)
Not reset after Trip Prevents starting of the motor until it is reset.
Any of the Digital Input is selected as Stop Input, Prevents starting of the motor until Stop Input is high.
and is low.
Starting: After START Exceed set starting time Relay trips the motor due to Excessive Start Time protection.
input is given or is
sensed till the motor Contactor feedback is not available even after START Relay stops the motor due to contactor feedback fault when
picks up speed command is given for a specified amount of time. one of the DI is configured as feedback.
Over-heating of the winding and insulation (Overload).
Jamming (Locked Rotor). Relay indicates an alarm and trips the motor if the
Running: Motor runs irregularity continues for an amount of time due to
in a stable manner Current is considerably lower than the running current. the corresponding protection.
Supply voltage goes low.
Leakage current flows in the motor (Earth Fault).
Supply frequency is not proper (under and over-frequency).
Relay indicates alarm and trips the motor if the irregularity
One of the supply phases is disconnected (Phase Loss). continues for set amount of time (or instantaneous) due to
Starting and running the corresponding protection.
conditions Number of starts exceeds permitted number within a
certain period.
Sequence of the 3-phase supply is changed (Phase Reversal).
Table 2-1: Motor Conditions

INTRODUCTION
Product Overview processor, input/output board, voltage sensing module and

communication module in a single modular enclosure. The
The MCOMP facilitates following bene ts to users:
current module gets connected to the Relay unit for current
Flexible protection, control and communication options to sensing. The Relay is further provided with bi/tri color LED
suit any Low Voltage (LV) contactor controlled motor starter indicators. There is also a reset push button available for local trip
application. reset.
Integrated push button and LED indicators reduce external There are mainly three variants of the Relay main unit depending
components and wiring. on selection of communication protocol:
Flexibility to choose from various standard communication 1. Modbus RTU
protocols allow affordable integration to larger and complex
2. Pro bus
Substation monitoring & control systems.
3. Modbus TCP/IP
The Relay comes with its own high accuracy current module
eliminating the three conventional CTs required for each Refer MCOMP order codes section for all possible variants of
phase. The built in 4-20 mA Analog Output eliminates the MCOMP relay.
Table 2-2 shows the LED status description.
need of transducer for remote metering. This reduces the
overall module size making it more compact and cost
effective. LED Indications on Main unit
Reset push button is available on the Relay and the Display One LED for Fault:
thereby reducing the need for one DI to be con gured as Glows Red when the Relay senses Trip condition.
Reset (Auto reset option is available for thermal overload and
One Tri-color LED for Motor status RUN/STOP/INHIBIT
under-voltage protection).
Glows Green when the Relay senses the motor is OFF and
The optional OLED Display is provided with the Relay for
ready to START.
display of all metering, protection and setting parameters.
Glows Red when the Relay senses the motor is ON.
Conformal coating on the PCB inside the Relay resists the
corrosive environment, hazardous chemicals, dust, etc,. and Glows Amber when the Relay senses the motor is in INHIBIT
increases the life & reliability of the product. mode.
One Bi-color LED for Alarm/Pickup
Relay Main unit Glows Amber when Alarm condition is sensed by the Relay.
This is a self-contained and fully functional unit housing the main Glows Red when Pickup condition is sensed by the Relay.
Relay Main Unit
Display Unit
FRC Cable
Expansion DIO Unit
CM Unit
Display Cable
Expansion Unit Cable
Figure 2.1 Product overview

INTRODUCTION
Reset Button
Resets the Trip condition of the Relay.
Resets the Relay to default settings when pressed for 3
seconds and released.
Drive LED s
Status of the Drive Drive Status Alarm/Pick up Trip
Running RED X OFF
Alarm X AMBER OFF
Pickup X RED OFF
Trip AMBER OFF RED
Inhibit AMBER X X
Ready to Start GREEN X OFF
Table 2-2: LED Status Description
Note: X Does not matter
Current Module (CM) Display unit

CM, provided with MCOMP, is used for 3-phase current sensing in The OLED Display is a detachable optional unit provided with the
motor starters ranging from 0.375 kW. Requisite connecting MCOMP for display of metering, protection and motor-speci c
cable for connection of CM to the Relay is supplied along with the parameters. The Display can additionally be used to con gure the
CM. Only one CM is required (up to 45 kW) for metering and Relay. The OLED Display is also provided with micro-USB front
protection, reducing the space which is required for conventional port to enable local parameterization through laptop using
CTs in the module. MCOMP Suite provided with the Relay.
There are two different sizes of CM, covering ve different current
ranges as shown in Table 2 3. DIO Expansion unit
Note: *When MCOMP is used with external conventional CT, it is The DIO Expansion unit is detachable optional unit provided with
required to enable the external CT ratio setting. In this case the MCOMP for increasing the count of Digital/Analog input and
starting range for IFLC is 50% of the primary current value set in the digital output as per application requirement. The expansion unit
external CT ratio setting. 50A mentioned in Table 2-3 is considering
comes in three types as 4DI/2DO module having 4 digital inputs &
the by default primary current as 100A in external CT ratio setting. If
primary current value changes, starting IFLC value changes accordingly. 2 digital outputs, 5DI/2AI module having 5 digital inputs & 2
analog inputs and 8DI module having 8 digital inputs. Depending
While selecting CM, it is strictly recommended to match the IFLC of the on the requirement of number of DI/DO or AI, suitable expansion
motor speci ed by motor manufacturer with CM IFLC range. module can be selected. The requisite connection cable of 0.4m
length comes along with expansion module. Maximum three
Motor rating in kW speci ed above is with considering approximate expansion modules can be connected to a single relay main unit.
scale factor of 1.8 between motor rating and IFLC. For IFLC range higher Refer table 8-10 in chapter Settings for details of all possible
than 80A, conventional CTs are required along with MCOMP CM. CM1
combination of DIO expansion unit connection to relay main unit.
and CM2 is used when secondary of conventional CT is 1 A and 5 A
respectively.
CM Type IFLC Range Motor Rating for 415V System

CM - 1 0.6 to 2.0 A 0.375 to 1.125 kW
CM - 2 1.8 to 5.4 A 1 to 3 kW
CM 3 4.5 to 13.5 A 2.5 to 7.5 kW
CM 4 12.6 to 37.8 A 7 to 21 kW
CM - 5 36 to 80 A 20 to 45 kW
With external conventional CT 50* to 600 A Up to 333 kW
Table 2-3: CM Type and Range

INTRODUCTION
LED Indications on Expansion unit LED s for DI/DO status:

One LED for Power (PWR): Glows Red when corresponding DI/DO status is high / energized
state.
Glows Green when the expansion unit gets power from relay
main unit.
Test Button (T):
One LED for Communication status (COMM): Tests the DI/DO circuitry and corresponding LEDs by switching
it ON and OFF. It is recommended to use this button only when
Glows Red when communication between the Relay main unit
drive is in stop condition and 3 phase voltage is not available to
and expansion module is healthy.
the drive/motor.
MCOMP Order Codes
Part number selection MCOMP MAIN UNIT PART NUMBER

MAIN UNIT
U P YI R MCOMP_MAIN_UNIT_U_P_YI_R
O Universal (80 230 V AC/DC)

Auxiliary Voltage
D 24 V DC
R Modbus RTU
Communication T Modbus TCP/IP
P Profibus DP
UI Universal (80 230 V AC/DC)
Voltage sensing for YI 230 V AC/DC

Digital Input Card ZI 110 V AC/DC
DI 24 V DC
R RTD Input Port

Temperature Input
P PTC Input Port
Table 2-4: Main unit order code
Part number selection MCOMP CURRNET MODULE PART NUMBER

CURRENT MODULE
C1 H MCOMP_CURRENT_MODULE_C1_H
CM Type C1 CM Type 1 ( Iflc : 0.6 2 A)

C2 CM Type 2 ( Iflc : 1.8 5.4 A)
C3 CM Type 3 ( Iflc : 4.5 13.5 A)
C4 CM Type 4 ( Iflc : 12.6 37.8 A)
C5 CM Type 5 ( Iflc : 36 80 A)
S Cable of 0.3 m
H Cable of 0.5 m
CM Main unit Cable
M Cable of 0.75 m
1 cable of 1 m
Table 2-5: Current Module order code

INTRODUCTION
DISPLAY UNIT Part number selection MCOMP DISPLAY UNIT PART NUMBER
D1 1 MCOMP_DISPLAY_UNIT_D1_1
Auxiliary Voltage D1 Universal (80 230 V AC/DC)

D2 24 V DC
H Cable of 0.5 m
Display Main unit Cable 1 Cable of 1 m
2 Cable of 2 m
Table 2-6: Display Unit order code
EXPANSION UNIT Part number selection MCOMP MAIN UNIT PART NUMBER
A YI H MCOMP_EXPANSION_UNIT_A_YI_H
A 4DI/2DO Expansion Unit

Module Type B 8DI Expansion Unit
C 5DI/2AI Expansion Unit
UI Universal (80 230 V AC/DC)
Voltage sensing for YI 230 V AC/DC

Digital Input Card
ZI 110 V AC/DC
DI 24 V DC
Expansion Main H Cable of 0.4 m
unit cable
Table 2-7: Expansion Unit order code
ACCESSORIES/ Part number selection MCOMP LOOSE CABLE PART NUMBER

LOOSE CABLES B MCOMP_LOOSE_CABLE_B
Cable Type A Display Main unit cable of 0.5 m

B Display Main unit cable of 1.0 m
C Display Main unit cable of 2.0 m
D CM Main unit cable of 0.5 m
E CM Main unit cable of 1.0 m
F Expansion Main unit cable of 0.4 m
G CM - Main unit cable of 0.3 m
H CM - Main unit cable of 0.75 m
Table 2-8: Accessories order code
Note: While selecting CM, it is strictly recommended to match the IFLC Above selection of MCOMP units and accessories is applicable for at
of the motor speci ed by motor manufacturer with CM IFLC range. For lid (ZX8* series CAT numbers) MCOMP relays. Ordering information of
IFLC range higher than 81A, conventional CTs are required along with earlier version of MCOMP units and CM units with dimensions 67 x
MCOMP CM. CM1 and CM2 is used when secondary of conventional 59.3 x 55 (D x W x H) for CM-1 module & 109.2 x 107.8 x 60 for CM 2-5
CT is 1 A and 5 A respectively. modules is available upon request.
While selecting main unit, 24 VDC voltage digital input card can be
selected only if auxiliary voltage is selected as 24 VDC.

INTRODUCTION
Getting Started
For understanding the full functionality of the Relay a basic 3. Once powered on, the motor status LED on the Relay and
knowledge is required. It includes powering-up the Relay, setting PWR/COMM LED on the Display glows.
date & time for recording of events/trips records. 4. If Display is present in the system, ensure a proper connection
The steps to be followed are shown below: is established between the Relay and the Display. After
connection, the Display shows L&T logo screen followed by
1. For powering-up the Relay, check for the power supply
metering screen within 3 seconds. This ensures healthy
requirement mentioned on the side label: 80-240 V AC/DC or
communication between the Relay and the Display.
24 V DC.
5. Set date and time of the Relay from Display Menu (Refer
2. Check for polarity of power supply as L/+ (Relay terminal
System Settings in chapter User Interface) or from special
72/Display terminal 75) and N/- (Relay terminal 71/Display
commands in MCOMP Suite (Refer Special Commands in
terminal 76) on the Relay/ Display.
chapter User Interface).

SPECIFICATIONS

SPECIFICATIONS
General
Full Load Current Setting (IFLC)

Setting Range 0.6 - 600 A
Rated Voltage Setting (VL-L)
Setting Range 380 800 V
Power Supply
Aux Supply Voltage For universal Aux supply:
AC: 110 - 240V
DC: 110 - 220V
For 24 VDC Aux supply:
24 VDC
Operational Aux Supply Voltage For universal Aux supply:
AC: 70-265 VAC,
DC: 93-265 VDC
For 24 VDC Aux supply:
18-28 VDC
Power Consumption Main unit:
For universal Aux supply : ~ 20VA or 20W
For 24 VDC Aux supply : ~ 18W
(Above power consumption values are including two expansion units connected to main unit)
Display unit:
For universal Aux supply : ~ 5VA or 5W
For 24 VDC Aux supply : ~ 5W
Frequency and Phase Sequence (settable)
System Frequency 50 or 60 Hz
Phase Sequence RYB or RBY
Digital Inputs
Inputs Optically Isolated
Sensing Range (current consumption and Sure On voltages (AC): Sure Off voltages (AC):
sure-ON voltage of DI channel)
1] 60-240 V AC/DC card = 63VAC (3mA) 1] 60-240 V AC/DC card = 53VAC
2] 110 V AC/DC card = 73VAC (3mA) 2] 110 V AC/DC card = 61VAC
3] 240V AC/DC card = 144VAC (2.5mA) 3] 240V AC/DC card = 122VAC
Sure On voltages (DC): Sure Off voltages (DC):

1] 60-240 V AC/DC card = 75VDC (3mA) 1] 60-240 V AC/DC card = 65VDC
2] 110 V AC/DC = 80VDC (3.1mA) 2] 110 V AC/DC = 71VDC
3] 240V AC/DC = 184VDC (2.6mA) 3] 240V AC/DC = 168VDC
4] 24V DC = 18VDC (2.2mA) 4] 24V DC = 16VDC
Table 3-1 (1): General Speci cations

SPECIFICATIONS
Digital Output Contacts

Base unit have all Form C contacts
Expansion unit have all Form A contacts
Rated Current 10 A on 240 V AC
10 A on 24 V DC
Maximum Breaking Capacity AC 2400 VA
Life expectancy Mechanical: 10,000,000 operations min. (at 18,000 operations/hr under no load)
Electrical: 100,000 operations average. (at 1,800 operations/hr under rated load)
Digital output operating time Pickup time - 4.8 ms
Drop off time - 4.4 ms
Analog Output
Current Output 4 20 mA
Accuracy ±5 %
Max. Load 200 Ohms
Isolation 2500 V
Assignable Parameters Voltage, Current, Power, Temperature, Frequency
Analog Input
Input Range 4 20 mA/0 20 mA (user selectable)
Accuracy ±1 % of full scale value
Resolution 12 bits
Input shunt resistance 50 Ohms
Max Input Current (Destructive) 24 mA
Conversion time 600 ms
Temperature Input
Input Type RTD (PT-100) or PTC Thermistor
Communication Ports
Micro-USB 1 on display front
RJ 11 (RS 485 support) 1 for MCOMP suite/display communication
4 Terminal Screw Type (RS 485 support) 1 in case of Modbus serial communication
DB9 Connector 1 in case of Profibus communication
RJ 45 port 1 in case of Modbus TCP/IP communication
Protocol Modbus or Profibus-DP or Modbus TCP/IP
Table 3-1 (2): General Speci cations
Dimensions
Component Depth (mm) Width (mm) Height (mm)

Relay 103.95 92 120
Display 35 96 51
CM 1 67 59.3 55
CM 2 to CM 5 109.2 107.8 60
Expansion Unit 102 83 70
Table 3-2: Dimensions

SPECIFICATIONS
Type Tests
Tests Standard Test Level

Cold IEC 60068-2-1 -20oC, 72 Hours
Temperature Cycling IEC 60068-2-14 -20oC to 70oC, 3 hrs, 2 cycles
Vibration IEC 60068-2-6 10 to 150 Hz, 1G
Dry Heat IEC 60068-2-2 -20oC to 70oC, 3hrs
Damp Heat IEC 60068-2-30 55oC, 6 cycles, 24 hrs/cycle, 95% relative humidity
Shock Resistance IEC 60255-21-2 30G, 18 shocks
Bump 25G, 6000 bumps
Enclosure Protection IP 41 enclosed in a panel
Dielectric IEC 60255-5:2000(Cl. No 6.1.4) 2kV, 1 min
Impulse IEC 60255-5:2000(Cl. No 6.1.3) 4kV
Voltage Dip and Interruption IEC 61000-4-11 Class A
Insulation Resistance IEC 60255-5:2000(Cl. No 6.2.2) 500 VDC, 5 sec
Electrostatic Discharge Immunity IEC 61000-4-2, edition 1.2, 2001-04 8kV air discharge 6kV contact discharge
Radiated RF Immunity IEC 61000-4-3 Severity Level 3 Field Strength 10 V/m
Fast Transient, Burst Immunity IEC 61000-4-4 4kV @ 5kHz
Surge Immunity IEC 61000-4-5 4kV line-to-earth
Conducted RF Immunity IEC 61000-4-6 Severity Level 3 Voltage level: 10 Vrms
High Frequency Disturbance Immunity IEC 61000-4-18 1kV, 3 pulses
Conducted Emission CISPR 22 @ IEC : 2005
Radiated Emission CISPR 22 @ IEC : 2005
Table 3-3: Type Tests
Certifications
Certification
ISO: Relay is designed and manufactured using ISO 9001 certified quality program.
CE: CE Mark- Low Voltage Directive, EMC Directive.
PNO: Relay is certified with PNO certificate from Profibus International for Profibus variant of the Relay.
Table 3-4: Certi cations
Environmental Conditions
Environmental Conditions
Typical conditions under which the Relay is designed to operate:
Temperature -20 to 70 °C (operating)
-40 to 85 °C (storage) Since the equipment consist of Electrolytic
capacitors, it is advised to Power ON the relay continuously at least
for an hour in period of one year.
Supply Voltage Fluctuation 10 % of nominal voltage
Relative Humidity 5 to 95 %
Table 3-5: Environmental Conditions

SPECIFICATIONS
Relay Elements
Relay Elements
Overload (49)
Setting Range 20 100 % IFLC
Thermal Memory Reset Value 5 30 %
Locked Rotor (50LR)
Trip Delay 0.5 30 sec
Phase Reversal (47B)
Setting Range RYB or RBY
Trip Delay Instantaneous
Phase Loss (47A)
Earth Fault (50N or 50 SG)
Type Vector Sum or CBCT

Setting Range Vector Sum = 20-500% IFLC CBCT = 0.1-20 A Primary
Excessive Start Time
Setting Range 1 200 sec
Mode Enable/Disable
Max Number of Starts (66)
Setting Range 15 60 min
Number of permissive starts 1 30
Inhibit Period 1 120 min
Under Current (37)
Setting Range 30 85 % Ir
Trip Delay 1 120 sec
Over Current (50P)
Under Voltage (27)
Setting Range 20 85 % VN
Current Unbalance (46)
Trip Delay 1 30 sec
Table 3-6 (1): Relay Elements

SPECIFICATIONS
Voltage Unbalance (47)
Over Voltage (59)
Under Frequency (81L)
Setting Range 94 98 % FS
Trip Delay 1 30 sec
Over Frequency (81H)
Setting Range 101 105 % FS
Trip Delay 1 30 sec
Over Frequency (81H)
Type : RTD or PTC 1 Pt-100 RTD or max. 6 PTC in series
Reacceleration (27LV)
Voltage Dip 20 90 % VN
Voltage Restoration 65 95 % VN
Restart Time 0.2 60 sec
Restart Delay 4 1200 sec
Communication Failure
Setting Range 2 10 sec
Trip Delay 1 30 sec
Trip only in Remote Enable/Disable
Time Delayed Phase Over Current (51P) Stage 1 and Stage 2
Time Constant 0.5 600 sec
IEC Curves Inverse, Very Inverse, Extremely Inverse
Time Delayed Neutral Over Current (51N) Stage 1 and Stage 2
Time Constant 0.5 600 sec
IEC Curves Inverse, Very Inverse, Extremely Inverse
Analog Input (Trip/Alarm)
Setting Range 0/4 20mA
Trip Delay 1 30 sec
Mode of reset Local / Auto / Communication / Remote
Table 3-6 (2): Relay Elements

SPECIFICATIONS
Metering
Metering Specifications
Line Currents Measurement Range 0 6000A with accuracy + 1% from 0.5 times IFLC to 1.5 times IFLC and beyond that + 5%
Earth fault current measurement range + 1% or + 50mA whichever is greater
Phase Voltages Measurement Range 0 600V with accuracy + 1% up to Nominal Voltage and + 5% after nominal voltage
Line Voltages Measurement Range 0 1000V with accuracy + 1% up to Nominal Voltage and + 5% after nominal voltage
Analog input measurement 0 / 4 20mA with ± 1% of full scale value up to 20mA and ±5% after 20mA till 24mA.
System Frequency + 1%
Active, Reactive, Apparent Power + 5%
Active, Reactive, Apparent Energy + 5%
Power Factor 0.9 to 1 with + 2%
0.707 to 0.9 with + 3%
0.5 to 0.707 with + 5%
Thermal Capacity + 2%
Temperature Measurement Range 0°C to +180°C in case of RTD, ±3o C
0 to 10K in case of PTC
Table 3-7: Metering Speci cations
Monitoring
Monitoring Specifications
Records Stores last five event records with date and time stamp.
Stores last five trip records with date and time stamp. Record gets stored with current, voltage, temperature,
frequency values present at the time of tripping.
Stores last stop cause
Hour Meter Records and stores last operational hours and total operation hours
Operation Counters Records and stores number of starts, stops and trips of the drive
Starting Curve Records and stores the starting characteristics of the drive
Starting Time Records and stores the start time taken
Starting Current Records the peak current taken during starting of the drive
DIO Status Shows real time status of digital input and output of the relay
Table 3-8: Monitoring Speci cations
Note: The Specifications are subject to change without notice.

INSTALLATION

INSTALLATION
Overview Installation of the Relay along with the dimensions and product
labels. These dimensions help in identifying proper installation
This section provides information about the installation of the
space for the Relay and its wiring connections.
Relay and the various connections attaching to the ports of the
Relay, CM, Display and DIO Expansion Module.
The user must be familiar with all con gurations and features in Dimensions
the Relay before installing, for safe installation and connection. The complete relay product package consists of the Relay, CM,
Expansion Module and the Display. The dimensions of all the units
are mentioned below. Some units may or may not be present
Mechanical Installation
depending on the ordering by the end user. Figure 4 1 to Figure
This section provides description about the Mechanical 4 5 shows the dimensions in diagrams.
Component Depth (mm) Width (mm) Height (mm)

Relay 103.95 92 120
Display 35 96 51
CM 1 67 59.3 35
CM 2 to CM 5 109.2 107.8 35
Expansion Unit 102 83 70
Main Unit Dimensions
92 103.95
103.95
120
LEGEND
MM
92
TOP VIEW FRONT VIEW SIDE VIEW
Figure 4-1: Main Unit Dimension
CM 1 Dimensions
59.3 35
67
LEGEND
35
MM
59.3
Figure 4-2: CM 1 Dimensions

INSTALLATION
CM 2-5 Dimensions
107.8 35
109.2
35
LEGEND
MM
107.8
Figure 4-3: CM 2-5 Dimensions
DIO Expansion Module Dimensions
84 102
102
LEGEND
70
MM
Figure 4-4: DIO Expansion Module Dimensions
Display Dimensions
96 35
PWR/COMM
35
51
MOTOR STATUS
LEGEND ALARM/PICKUP
Mini USB Port
MM RST ENT
L
TRIP N
96
Figure 4-5: Display Dimensions

INSTALLATION
Product Identification Label
The product identi cation label gives information about the Procedure:
product model, serial number, and revision number. It is located
1. Before mounting the Relay, ensure that power supply to
on the side of the units. Figure 4 6 shows format of the product
control panel is disconnected and the relay is free from all
identi cation label.
power connections.
2. Pull the DIN Clip.
3. Position the Relay on the DIN Rail properly.
4. Push the DIN Clip to x the Relay.
5. Follow the reverse procedure for removal of the Relay.
CM Mounting
CM is mounted on the 15mm DIN Rail provided in the motor

starter module. Figure 4 8 shows the mounting of CM.
Figure 4-6: Product Identi cation Label
2
Mounting
1
Relay Mounting
Din Rail
The Relay is mounted on 30 mm DIN Rail provided in the motor
starter module. Figure 4 7 shows the Relay mounting.
3 Din Clip
3
Din Rail
Figure 4-8: CM Mounting
2 Procedure:
2. Position the CM unit on the DIN Rail properly.
3. Push the DIN Clip to x the CM unit.
4. Follow the reverse procedure for removal of the CM.
Note: Note: Mounting of Current module with increased height as

Din Clip
compared to height mentioned in this manual requires 30mm DIN rail
4 instead of 15mm DIN rail.
Figure 4-7: Relay Mounting

INSTALLATION
Display Mounting DIO Expansion Module Mounting
The Display can be mounted in a cut-out on the front door by The DIO Expansion Module is mounted on 30mm DIN Rail
using mounting clips provided. The cut out dimension required is provided in the motor starter module. Figure 4 10 shows the DIO
(W x H) : 92.5 x 45 mm. Figure 4 9 shows the Display Mounting. Expansion Module installation.
Panel
Frame Din Rail
2
Display
Cutout
Din Clip
4
Figure 4-10: DIO Expansion Module Mounting
Procedure:
Mounting 1. Before installation, ensure that power supply to control panel
Clip is disconnected and the DIO Expansion module is free from all
power connections.
Figure 4-9: Display Mounting 3. Position the DIO Expansion Module on the DIN Rail properly.
4. Push the DIN Clip to x the DIO Expansion Module.
Procedure: 5. Follow the reverse procedure for removal of the DIO
1. Before installation, ensure that power supply to control panel Expansion Module.
is disconnected and the relay is free from all power
connections.
2. Place the Display at the respective attaching place on the cut-
out of the control plate.
3. To install the Display use the mounting clips. Place the clip on
the slot provided and push it towards the control plate. Or it
can be directly place to the end of control plate and t it by
just pressing it on Display.
4. Follow the reverse procedure the removal of the Display.

INSTALLATION
Electrical Installation
This section describes about the electrical installation of the Relay

main unit, CM, Display and DIO Expansion module. Figure 4 11
shows the typical relay wiring diagram.
R
Y
B
N
SFU / MCCB
FUSE L/+
N/-
1 2 3 4 71 72
N B Y R N/- L/+
3-PH.VOLTAGE AUX.VOLT
CONTACTOR
START
82
DIGITAL OUTPUT CONTACTS
61 Dl1
83
DIGITAL INPUTS
62 Dl2
STOP
63 Dl3 81
RESET 64 Dl4 85 CONTACTOR COIL
65 Dl5 86
66 Dl6 84
67 COM 88
89
R Y B 87
91 TRIP INDICATION
92
CBCT
CM UNIT 90
PWR/COMM
S1 MOTOR STATUS
S2 ALARM/PICKUP
R Y B RTD/PTC ANALOG O/P RS485
L
RST ENT
Tl1 Tl2 AO1 AO2 D+ D- TRIP Mini USB Port N
M MODBUS RS485 LOOPING
4-20mA OUTPUT
TO FIELD AMMETER
RTD/PTC
Figure 4-11: Typical wiring diagram

INSTALLATION
Relay Main Unit Wiring
VR 4 Tl1 54
VY 1 3 Tl2 53
5 L/+ 72
VB 2 AO1 52
N/- 7 71
NEU 1 AO2 51
CM Connector
Pro bus
2 4 N/C4 92
COM4 91
N/04 90
Trip N/C3 89
Drive Status COM3 88
Alarm/Pick up COM 67 N/O3 87
Reset
8
l/P6 66 N/C2 86
l/P5 65 COM2 85
Display Port Expansion
3A l/P4 6 64 N/O2 84
Port
l/P3 63 N/C1 83
l/P2 62 COM1 82
3B l/P1 61 N/O1 81
Figure 4-12 (1): Overview of the Relay Main Unit Figure 4-12 (2): Main unit
Table 4-2 lists the terminal description for Relay main unit. The
relay main unit package consists of MCOMP main unit with its
mounting din clip and terminal connectors for wire termination.
Label Terminal Description Possible Wire Size
1 3-Phase Reference Voltage Connector (R,Y, B, N) 2.5 sq. mm *

(Screw Thread = M2.5, Tightening torque = 0.51 Nm)
2 Current Module Connector Prefabricated cable

3A Expansion Module Connector Prefabricated cable
3B Display/MCOMP Suite Connector Prefabricated cable
4 Communication Port (Modbus RTU/Profibus/Modbus TCP/IP) For Modbus 0.5 sq. mm

(Screw Thread = M2, Tightening torque = 0.2 Nm)
For Profibus, TCP/IP Respective cable with standard connector
5 Temperature Input (RTD or PTC) and Analog Output Connector 0.5 sq. mm *
(Screw Thread = M2, Tightening torque = 0.2 Nm)
6 Digital Input Connector 2.5 sq. mm *

7 Auxiliary Supply Connector 2.5 sq. mm *

8 Digital Output Connector 2.5 sq. mm *

Table 4-2: Relay main unit terminal description
Note: * In case terminals 3A and 3B is present on the Relay as a combined single terminal, refer MCOMP manual revision B for wiring of such type of a
relay. The wire size mentioned here may not be applicable in such case.

INSTALLATION
3 Phase Voltage Connections 3-Phase Current Connections
Connection to this particular terminal depends on the application The connection to the current input port is from the CM. Figure
of the relay. Refer Application Notes for various types of 4 14 shows the 3-phase current cable connection.
connections as per application requirement. The typical
connection for this terminal in case of 3P-4W system is shown in
Figure 4 13. Procedure to wire the current connector:
1. Ensure that the Relay is free from all power connections.
Procedure to wire the voltage connector: 2. Check the CM cable for proper operation.
1. Ensure that the Relay is free from all power connections. 3. Press the notch and insert the CM cable connector in the
Relay current connector.
2. Check the connector cable for proper operation.
4. Release the notch.
3. Loosen the terminal screws of the connector.
4. Insert the RYBN wires (as per application requirement) in their
respective terminals. Procedure for removal of the current connector:
5. Tighten the terminal screws. 1. Ensure that the Relay is free from all power connections.
6. Anchor the connector by using two connector screws. 2. Press the notch and remove the CM cable connector from the
Relay current connector.
Procedure for removal of the voltage connector:
2. Loosen the two connector screws.
3. Detach the connector from the Relay.
R
Y
B 61 Dl1
N
62 Dl2
DIGITAL INPUTS
63 Dl3
64 Dl4
FUSE
65 Dl5
66 Dl6
67 COM
NLK
1 2 3 4 71 72
N B Y R N/- L/+
61 Dl1
DIGITAL INPUTS
62 Dl2
63 Dl3
64 Dl4
65 Dl5
CBCT
66 Dl6
67 COM
CM UNIT
Figure 4-13: 3 Phase Voltage Connections Figure 4-14: 3 Phase Current Connections

INSTALLATION
Configuration Port Connection
The Relay con guration can be done in two ways by using: 3. Press the notch and insert the Display RS485 cable connector
in the Relay con guration port.
1. Display
2. MCOMP Suite
Figure 4-16 shows the con guration port connection using
MCOMP Suite. Procedure for removal of the connector:
Procedure to wire the connector: 2. Press the notch and remove the Display RS485 cable
connector from the Relay con guration port.
2. Check the Display RS485 connector cable for proper
operation.
61 Dl1
62 Dl2
DIGITAL INPUTS
63 Dl3
64 Dl4
65 Dl5
66 Dl6
67 COM
Figure 4-15: Con guration Port Connection
RS485
CONVERTER
Figure 4-16: Con guration Port connection using MCOMP suite

INSTALLATION
RTD/PTC and Analog O/P Connections Communication Port Connection
Positive Temperature Coef cient (PTC) or RTD input is directly RS485 and RJ45 are available for communication. These ports are
connected to this port. PT100 is used as a temperature sensing used to communicate with the upper level systems such as
unit. The output of PT100 will act as RTD input in the Relay and EWS/DCS/SCADA on either Modbus RTU / Profibus / Modbus
the temperature range can be measured between 0 to 180 °C. TCP/IP protocol. Figure 4 18 to Figure 4 26 show the
communication connection with looping diagrams.
RTD or PTC inputs in the Relay are dependent on the ordering
code. For RTD/PTC input, the wire should get connected at
RS485 Port Connection for MODBUS RTU
terminal 53/TI2 and 54/TI1. If no RTD/PTC is connected, the
RTD/PTC Alarm and Trip setting must be disabled.
The analog output ranges from 4-20 mA. It can be mapped to any
of the parameters like 3-Phase Voltage, 3-Phase Current,
Frequency, Power, etc,. This output is given to an analog meter
like LCS meter (4 20 mA), DCS for monitoring, etc,. For analog
output the wire should get connected at terminals 52/AO1 (+ve)
and 51/AO2 (-ve). Figure 4 17 shows the cable connections.
Relay
Procedure to wire the connector:
RS485 MODBUS
1. Ensure that the Relay is free from all power connections. RTD/PTC ANALOG O/P D+ D+ D- D-
T1 TI2 AO1 AO2 41 42 43 44
2. Check the RTD/PTC/Analog connector cable for proper
operation.
MODBUS RS485
3. Loosen the terminal screws of the connector. LOOPING
4. Insert the cables in their respective terminals.

Figure 4-18: Modbus RS485 connection
5. Tighten the terminal screws.
6. Anchor the connector by using two connector screws.
RS485 Port Connection for PROFIBUS
Procedure for removal of the connector:

2. Loosen the two connector screws.
3. Detach the connector from the Relay.
Relay
RS485 PROFIBUS
RTD/PTC ANALOG O/P
T1 TI2 AO1 AO2
PROFIBUS RS485
LOOPING
Relay Figure 4-19: Pro bus RS485 port connection
RTD/PTC ANALOG O/P RS485

T1 TI2 AO1 AO2 D+ D-
MODBUS RS485
LOOPING
4-20mA OUTPUT
TO FIELD AMMETER
RTD/PTC
Figure 4-17: Temperature and Analog output connections

INSTALLATION
EWS D+
SCADA EWS / SCADA / DCS
DCS
D-
Relay
41 D+
42 D+
43 D-
44 D- Relay
41 D+
42 D+ Relay
43 D-
44 D- Relay
41 D+
42 D+
43 D-
Relay
44 D- Relay
D+ D-
Figure 4-20: Modbus/Pro bus looping connections
RJ45 Port Connection for MODBUS TCP/IP

2. Check the communication cable for proper operation.
3. Press the notch and insert the communication cable in the
Relay communication port.
Relay
RJ45 PORT
1. Ensure that the Relay is free from all power connections. RTD/PTC ANALOG O/P
T1 TI2 AO1 AO2
2. Press the notch and remove the cable from the Relay
communication port. RJ45 MODBUS
TCP/IP PORT
Figure 4-21: Modbus TCP/IP RJ 45 port connection

INSTALLATION
Auxiliary Power Supply Connection Digital Input Connections
Auxiliary power supply is required to power up the Relay. The Relay main unit has six DIs and one common terminal
Universal power supply ranging from 80 to 240 V AC/DC or 24 V through which it senses the status of the motor and commands;
DC is used as an auxiliary supply. Figure 4 22 shows auxiliary and works accordingly. Six isolated digital inputs sense the
supply connection. voltage ranging from 60 V to 240 V AC/DC or 24 V DC and is
dependent on the selected voltage sensing range during ordering
of the relay. The six contact inputs can be programmed to any of
Procedure to wire the auxiliary supply connector: the input functions such as Stop, Start, Interlock, Reset, etc,.
Note: For proper sensing of Digital Inputs, the common terminal must
2. Loosen the terminal screws. be connected to neutral in case of AC, and to negative (-ve) in case
of DC.
3. Insert the supply wires in their respective terminals. Make sure
the power supply rating of the Relay before inserting the
supply wires into it. Figure 4 23 shows digital input connection.

5. Anchor the auxiliary supply connector by using two Procedure to wire the connector:
connector screws. 1. Check the connector cable for proper operation.
2. Loosen the terminal screws.
Procedure for removal of the connector: 3. Insert the wires in their respective terminals.
1. Ensure that the Relay is free from all the possible power 4. Tighten the terminal screws.
connections.
5. Anchor the DI connector cable by using two connector
2. Loosen the two connector screws. screws.
3. Remove the auxiliary supply connector from the Relay.

N/- 2. Loosen the two connector screws.
3. Remove the DI connector cable from the Relay.
L/+
1 2 3 4 71 72
N/- L/+
N B Y R N/- L/+
61 Dl1
DIGITAL INPUTS
62 Dl2
61 Dl1 63 Dl3
64 Dl4
DIGITAL INPUTS
62 Dl2
63 Dl3 65 Dl5
64 Dl4 66 Dl6
65 Dl5 67 COM
66 Dl6
67 COM
Figure 4-22: Auxiliary Supply connection Figure 4-23: Digital Input connections

INSTALLATION
Digital Output Connections Current Module (CM) Wiring
The Relay main unit has four change-over potential free output Figure 4-25 shows overview of the Current Module Unit.
contacts. These DOs have the current carrying capacity of 10 A on
Table 4-3 lists the terminal description for Current module unit.
240 V AC. Each change-over contact has following terminals:
The current module unit package consists of MCOMP current
N/O (Normally Open) - It is normally not connected to the module unit with its mounting din clip and prefabricated FRC
common of the corresponding DO. When a DO is activated, the cable for connection with Relay main unit. The length of the cable
corresponding N/O contact is shorted to the common of that DO. is dependent on the ordered part number.
N/C (Normally Closed) - It is normally connected to the common
of the corresponding DO. When a DO is activated, the
corresponding N/C contact becomes open to the common of the
corresponding DO.
COM - It is the common terminal available to which NO and NC
terminals are connected alternately according to the activation of
the corresponding output.
These outputs can be programmed to any of the output functions
like alarm, trip, etc,. Figure 4 24 shows digital output connection.

2. Loosen the terminal screws.
3. Insert the wires in their respective terminals.
Figure 4-25: Current Module unit overview
5. Anchor the DO connector by using two connector screws.
Label Terminal Possible Wire Size/Diameter
Description
Procedure for removal of the connector: 3-Phase Current CM 1 pass through dia.: 4.5 mm
(R,Y,B)
Pass through Hole
1. Make sure that the Relay is free from all the power CM 2-5 pass through dia.: 16 mm
connections. 0.5 sq. mm*
2. Loosen the two connector screws. CBCT Input
1 (Screw Thread = M2,
Connector
3. Detach the DO connector from the Relay. Tightening torque = 0.2 Nm)
Current Module
2 Prefabricated cable
Connector
R
Y
B Table 4-3: Current Module terminal description
N
Note: * In case separate terminal for CBCT connection is not available

on CM unit, refer MCOMP manual revision B for wiring of such type of a
relay. The wire size mentioned here may not be applicable in such case.
SFU / MCCB
82 L/+
83
CONTACTOR
81 N/-
85 CONTACTOR COIL
86
84
88 L/+
89
R Y B 87 N/-
91 TRIP INDICATION
92
CBCT
CM UNIT
90
S1
S2
R Y B
Figure 4-24: Digital Output connections

INSTALLATION
The Relay is provided with its own CM. CM is available in 5 types. earth fault current under abnormal conditions. This is used as
an input by the Relay to measure earth fault current. Figure
CM has pass through arrangement, through which the motor
4 26 shows CM wiring.
supply wires (R, Y and B) enters (all three wires should enter
from same side) in to the CM before connecting to the motor. In case where external conventional CTs are required to sense
the current if the motor IFLC is greater than 80 A, the
The connecting wire from CM to the Relay is of two types
connection will be as shown in Figure 4 27. Based on the
based on its length (0.5 m and 1 m).
secondary of external CT, MCOMP current module is selected
In case of sensitive earth fault, CBCT is used. The 3-phase for the required application.
supply to the motor passes through CBCT which senses the
R Y B
CBCT
CM UNIT
S1
S2
R Y B
Figure 4-26: Current Module connections

INSTALLATION
R
Y
B
N
SFU / MCCB
FUSE L/+
N/-
1 2 3 4 71 72
N B Y R N/- L/+
2 4 6 2 4 6
1 3 5 1 3 5
START1 82

61 Dl1
START2 83
DIGITAL INPUTS
62 Dl2
CONTACTOR A CONTACTOR B
63 Dl3 81
STOP
64 Dl4 85 CONTACTOR COIL
RESET 65 Dl5 86
66 Dl6 84
67 COM 88
89
87
91 TRIP INDICATION
92
EXTERNAL CT
90
PWR/COMM
B Y R
MOTOR STATUS
CBCT
ALARM/PICKUP
CM UNIT RTD/PTC ANALOG O/P RS485 L
RST ENT
S1
MODBUS RS485 LOOPING
S2
R Y B 4-20mA OUTPUT
TO FIELD AMMETER
RTD/PTC
Figure 4-27: External Conventional CT connections
Note: Ensure that all cables (RYB) enter from single side. The Relay auto detects the CM type. Ensure power recycle of the Relay after proper connection
with the CM.
Display Wiring
The OLED Display is an optional unit provided with the Relay to 4 28 shows the Display front and bottom view. The Display unit
display metering, protection and drive speci c parameters. Figure package consists of MCOMP
PWR/COMM
L/+ N/+
MOTOR STATUS D-
ALARM/PICKUP
Mini USB Port
L D+
RST ENT
TRIP N
Figure 4-28: Display front and bottom view

INSTALLATION
Display unit along with its 4 mounting clips and Display-cable for 3. Front USB Port Connection.
connecting to relay main unit. The length of the Display-cable is
The OLED Display is provided with a USB port in the front. It
dependent on the ordered part number.
enables local con guration through computer/laptop using
MCOMP Suite. Mini USB cable is required for the connection.
Figure 4 31 shows the Display front port connection.
1. Con guration Port connection.
Con guration port (RJ-11) is provided to communicate with the
Relay. Figure 4 29 shows the con guration port available at
bottom side of the Display. A prefabricated cable comes along
with the display to connect to the relay main unit.
L/+ N/+
D-
D+
PWR/COMM
MOTOR STATUS
ALARM/PICKUP
Mini USB Port
L
RST ENT
TRIP N
Figure 4-29: Display con guration port connections Figure 4-31: Display front USB port connection
Note: * In case RJ11 port is not available on display unit, refer MCOMP
2. Auxiliary Supply Connection. manual revision B for wiring of such type of a relay.
An auxiliary supply is needed to power up the Display, which will

get connected to the port provided at the bottom side of the
Display. Figure 4 30 shows the Display auxiliary supply
connection. Possible wire size for termination is 0.5 sq. mm.
Auxiliary Supply
L/+ N/+
D-
D+
Figure 4-30: Display auxiliary supply connection

INSTALLATION
Expansion Unit Wiring
The DIO Expansion unit is detachable optional unit used along Maximum number of 5DI/2AI or 3DI/2DO/2AI units allowed
with MCOMP main unit for increasing the count of Digital/Analog to be connected to main unit is 1. 5DI/2AI unit and
input and digital output as per application requirement. The 3DI/2DO/2AI unit cannot be connected together to main unit.
expansion unit comes in three types as 4DI/2DO module having 4
If 5DI/2AI or 3DI/2DO/2AI unit is connected along with
digital inputs & 2 digital outputs, 5DI/2AI module having 5 digital
4DI/2DO or 8DI expansion unit then it should be connected as
inputs & 2 analog inputs and 8DI module having 8 digital inputs.
last unit in the series.
The expansion unit package consists of MCOMP expansion unit
with its mounting din clip and expansion-cable of 0.4 meter for Table 4-4 lists the terminal description for various types of
connecting to relay main unit. Refer Digital input and Digital Expansion module units.
output wiring sections in Main unit wiring for expansion DIO Table 4-5 shows all possible combination of expansion units
wiring connections. which can be successfully connected together to the main unit.
Maximum three expansion modules can be connected to a single Figure 4-32 shows MCOMP main unit and expansion unit
relay main unit provided: connection representation:
Maximum number of 4DI/2DO units allowed to be connected
to main unit is 2.
Expansion Module Type Label, Terminal Description and possible wire size
DI1-DI8:
Field input connection points
Dl1 Dl2 Dl3 Dl4 COM COM
DO1(1-2),DO2(3-4):
1234 N/O Digital output connection points
Dip switches AI1+/-, AI2+/-:
T
Analog inputs connection points
1 2 3 4 COM:
DO1 DO2 4DI/2DO Module Wire neutral in case of AC digital inputs, -ve supply in
case of DC digital inputs
T:
Dl1 Dl2 Dl3 Dl4 Dl5 Dl6 COM COM Test push button
1,2,3,4 Dip switches:
1234
Select module ID for expansion module as per
Dip switches
T
configuration done in relay main unit
When 1000 => module id 1
Dl7 COM COM Dl8
8Dl Module
Dl1 Dl2 Dl3 COM Al1+ Al1- Al2+ Al2-
1234
Possible wire size for all termination points: 2.5 sq. mm.
Dip switches
T
(Screw Thread = M3, Tightening torque = 0.45-0.5 Nm)
Dl4 COM COM Dl5

5Dl/2Al Module
Table 4-4: Expansion Module terminal description

INSTALLATION
VR 4 Tl1 54
VY 3 Tl2 53
L/+ 72
VB 2 AO1 52
N/- 71
NEU 1 AO2 51
CM Connector
Pro bus
N/C4 92
COM4 91
N/04 90
N/C3 89
Trip
Drive Status COM3 88 Expansion unit 1 Expansion unit 2 Expansion unit 3
Alarm/Pick up COM 67 N/O3 87
Reset l/P6 66 N/C2 86
l/P5 65 COM2 85
Display Port Expansion
Dl1 Dl2 Dl3 Dl4 Dl5 Dl6 COM COM Dl1 Dl2 Dl3 Dl4 Dl5 Dl6 COM COM Dl1 Dl2 Dl3 Dl4 Dl5 Dl6 COM COM
l/P4 64 N/O2 84 1234 1234 1234
Port
l/P3 63 N/C1 83 Dip switches Dip switches Dip switches

l/P2 62 COM1 82 T T T
l/P1 61 N/O1 81
Dl7 COM COM Dl8 Dl7 COM COM Dl8 Dl7 COM COM Dl8
8Dl Module 8Dl Module 8Dl Module
Relay main unit
Figure 4-32: Main unit and expansion unit connection
Single unit Combination Expansion unit 1 Expansion unit 2 Expansion unit 3
1 4DI/2DO X X
2 8DI X X
3 5DI/2AI X X
4 3DI/2DO/2AI X X
Two unit Combination Expansion unit 1 Expansion unit 2 Expansion unit 3
1 4DI/2DO 8DI X
2 4DI/2DO 4DI/2DO X
3 4DI/2DO 5DI/2AI X
4 4DI/2DO 3DI/2DO/2AI X
5 8DI 8DI X
6 8DI 5DI/2AI X
7 8DI 3DI/2DO/2AI X
Three unit Combination Expansion unit 1 Expansion unit 2 Expansion unit 3
1 4DI/2DO 4DI/2DO 8DI
2 4DI/2DO 8DI 8DI
3 8DI 8DI 8DI
4 8DI 8DI 5DI/2AI
5 8DI 8DI 3DI/2DO/2AI
6 8DI 4DI/2DO 5DI/2AI
7 8DI 4DI/2DO 3DI/2DO/2AI
Table 4-5: Expansion unit connection combinations

METERING AND
MONITORING

METERING AND MONITORING
Overview Average of True RMS Current

This chapter describes the various parameters available in the The average current is calculated using formula:
Relay for metering and monitoring. The Relay measures real-time Iavg = (Ir + Iy + Ib)/3
values of Current, Voltage, Power, Analog Output, Temperature
and monitors motor speci c data like number of starts, stops,
running hours, etc,. Thermal Capacity
All values measured by the Relay can be accessed using following The Thermal Capacity is the tolerable capacity that the motor can
interfaces: withstand under overload condition. It is calculated internally by
Display the Relay as per IEC 60255 curve. To calculate the Thermal
Capacity, the Relay uses the IFLC of the Motor, instantaneous
MCOMP Suite running current and trip class of the Motor.
Communication Port
Current Unbalance
Metering Current unbalance is calculated in percentage as explained in
Current Based Metering Protection Chapter under Current Unbalance Protection. It is
instantaneously available for monitoring in MCOMP suite &
True RMS Line Current
Display monitoring window.
The Relay measures RMS values of line currents (Ir, Iy and Ib)
through CM.
Voltage Based Metering
Ir: Current owing through R phase
True RMS Line Voltage
Iy: Current owing through Y phase
The Relay measures the RMS value of the line voltage (Vry, Vyb
Ib: Current owing through B phase
and Vbr).
Vry: Voltage of R phase with respect to Y phase
Earth Fault Current
Vyb: Voltage of Y phase with respect to B phase
Earth Fault Current is an unbalanced current which can be
Vbr: Voltage of B phase with respect to R phase
represented by vector summation. In case of 3-phase system,
under healthy conditions, Earth Fault current will be zero. It is
present only when Earth Fault occurs. The Relay measures the True RMS Phase Voltage
Earth Fault current in following ways.
The Relay measures phase to neutral voltages (Vr, Vy and Vb).
Vr: Voltage of R phase with respect to neutral
Vector Summation
Vy: Voltage of Y phase with respect to neutral
Earth Fault Current is equal to the vector sum of three line current
values. It is calculated using formula: Vb: Voltage of B phase with respect to neutral
Ie = Ir + Iy + Ib
Where Ie is Earth Fault Current. Average of True RMS Voltage
Average RMS voltage is calculated using formula:
CBCT (Core Balance Current Transformer) Vavg = (Vr + Vy + Vb)/3
CBCT is used for earth leakage and sensitive Earth Fault

conditions. The 3-phase supply to the motor passes through Frequency
CBCT which senses the Earth Fault current under abnormal
Relay measures the frequency of the 3-phase voltage supplied to
conditions. The output of CBCT is used as an input by the Relay to
the Motor.
measure Earth Fault current.

Power and Energy Based Metering Power Factor

Power Power Factor is the cosine of the angle between the phase
currents and phase voltages. It can also be represented as the
Active, Reactive, and Apparent Power are based on the following
absolute value of the ratio of Active Power to Apparent Power.
factors:
Power Factor is calculated using formula:
3-phase RMS phase voltage Vr, Vy, Vb
Power Factor = Active Power / Apparent Power
3-phase RMS line current Ir, Iy, Ib
Power factor (cos φ)
Active power is also known as real power which gives the RMS
Miscellaneous Parameter
value of power. It is calculated using formula: Temperature
Active Power (kW) = Vr x Ir x cos φ x Vy x Iy x cos φ + Vb x Ib x cos φ Relay measures the temperature of the Motor by using RTD or
PTC inputs. RTD measures temperature in terms of degree
Celsius, PTC measures temperature in terms of ohmic value.
Reactive Power is calculated using formula:
Reactive Power (kVAR) = Vr x Ir x sin φ x Vy x Iy x sin φ + Vb x Ib x sin
Digital Input/Output Status
φ
Relay shows Real time (activated or deactivated) status of Digital
Input/Output.
Apparent Power is calculated using formula:
Apparent Power (kVA) = (Total Active Power)² + (Total Reactive Power)²
COMPlogic output Status
Relay shows Real time (activated or deactivated) status of
Energy COMPlogic outputs (Truth tables, timer, counters etc)
The energy consumed by the load can be calculated using
formula:
Monitoring
Active Energy (kWh) = Total Active Power X Number of Hours Run
Motor Speci c Data Monitoring
Reactive Energy (kVARh) = Total Reactive Power x Number of Hours
Run Phase Sequence
Apparent Energy (kVAh) = Total Apparent Power x Number of Hours Relay detects the phase sequence (Voltage Phase Sequence) of
Run the 3-phase motor.
Motor Starting Time

Relay measures the actual time taken by the Motor to start. The
j(lm) S
motor starting time is measured as time taken by average current
to rise from 0 A to a value above IFLC and drop back below IFLC
value. Figure 5 2 illustrates the starting curve of the motor.
S
Q
Current (RMS)
Motor
O Curve
O P Re S
IFLC
Figure 5-1: Power Factor Ir
Pre Start Starting Time Running
Figure 5-2: Starting curve of the motor

CM Type Total Motor Run Hours
Relay auto detects the type of CM connected to the Main Unit. Relay measures the total number of hours the motor has run from
the time the Relay settings have been restored.
Number of Starts
Starting Peak Current
Relay measures the total number of times the motor has started
from the time factory settings of the Relay has been stored. It is the maximum current drawn by the motor during the starting
time as shown in Figure 5 2.
Number of Stops
Annunciations
Relay measures the total number of times the motor has stopped
from the time factory settings of the Relay has been restored. Relay indicates healthy/unhealthy status of the motor such as
Ready to start, Run, Trip, Alarm and Inhibit conditions using
annunciation LEDs.
Motor Run Hours
Relay measures the number of hours the motor has run from the
time it has last been started.

PROTECTIONS

PROTECTIONS
Overview Pickup Set: A setting limit for the monitored parameter that
triggers Pickup of a protection function. Pickup set is calculated
This section provides a detailed description about the various
using formula:
faults possible in the motor; their causes and the preventive
measures taken by the Relay to protect the motor. Alarm is an Pickup Set = Pickup Set in % of corresponding parameter
indication which requires immediate attention. It indicates a need = (Pickup Set in %) X (Parameter Value)/100
for corrective action to prevent fault occurrence. It may result into
serious implications if not noticed. The alarm-related parameters Example: For Locked Rotor protection, the corresponding
can be con gured for most of the protection functions. parameter is IFLC. If IFLC value is 10 A, then the corresponding
parameter value will be 10 A, for Pickup Set of 150 %:
Pickup Set Value (IOC) = (150 x 10) / 100 = 15 A
The Relay responds to an Alarm in following ways:
The alarm gets activated upon the occurrence of any fault.
Alarm Set: A limit in % for the monitored parameter that triggers
The cause and time for the Alarm/Pickup will be recorded. a protection function alarm. Alarm Set value is calculated using
Alarm/Pickup LED glows Amber. formula:
The Relay counts and records the number of Alarm/Pickup Alarm Set = Alarm Set in % of corresponding parameter
conditions. = (Alarm Set in %) X (Pickup Set)/100
Example: For Locked Rotor protection, the corresponding
The Relay responds to a fault in following ways: parameter is IOC (Pickup Set). If IOC value is 15 A, then the
corresponding parameter value will be 15 A and for Alarm set of
On the Relay, trip LED glows Red.
90 %:
On the Relay, motor status LED glows Amber.
Alarm Set value = (90 x 15) / 100 = 13.5
DO of the Relay used for starter will go LOW.
DO of the Relay used for tripping will go HIGH.
Hysteresis band: This setting de nes the reset value for the
The Relay stores the data for the cause of fault along with the alarm and pickup set values for respective protection. Hysteresis
parameters such as time of fault, source of fault and setting is categorized into three settings as current, voltage and
corresponding values of Current, Voltage, Earth Current, frequency to provide alarm/pickup reset values for all current
Temperature, Power Factor and Frequency. The Relay keeps a based, voltage based and frequency based protections
count for the number of faults occurred and stores ve events & respectively.
ve trip records which can be viewed by the user at any point of
time. Parameter Setting Range Step Increase Factory Setting
The Relay clears the alarm/pickup whenever the measured value Current 3 15 % 1% 3%
drops below the Alarm/Pickup Reset threshold.
Voltage 3 15 % 1% 3%
Figure 6 1 describes a typical motor protection function. This
diagram is expressed in terms of a measuring parameter. Frequency 1 15 % 1% 3%
Table 4-6: Hysteresis setting

Measuring parameter (X)
Pickup Reset: A setting limit for the monitored parameter that
X>=Xa resets (removes) the Pickup condition when the corresponding
X>=XP
monitored parameter resumes to a safe value, else the Pickup
condition persists. Pickup Reset is calculated using formula:
Instantaneous Pickup Reset = (Pickup Set)*(100 + Hysteresis band setting)/100

Trip Delay
Example: If pickup set value is 15 A for locked rotor protection,
Trip Alarm and if current setting in hysteresis band is 5 % then:
Pickup Reset Value = (15)*(100 - 5) / 100 = 14.25 A
Figure 6-1: Motor Protection Function
Where, Alarm Reset: A limit that resets the alarm condition when the
corresponding monitored parameter resumes to a safe value, else
X: Measuring Parameter
the alarm condition persists. Alarm Reset value is calculated using
Xa: Alarm threshold value formula:
Xp: Trip set value Alarm Reset = (Alarm Set)*(100 + Hysteresis band setting)/100

PROTECTIONS
Example: If alarm set value is 15 A for under current protection, Note: Factory default setting is class 10 for Overload protection.
and if current setting in hysteresis band is 5 % then:
Alarm Reset Value = (15)*(100 + 5) / 100 = 15.75 A
Reset modes: Reset mode allows the user to select a desirable
mode to reset the trip condition. The available modes are:
Trip Delay: A time limit after which the Relay issues Trip Local: Reset from MCOMP Suite or Display
command from the time of Pickup, if condition persists.
Remote: Reset through Digital Input
Communication: Reset through Modbus RTU, Pro bus or
Trip Curve Characteristic (TCC): The Relay includes a de nite Modbus TCP/IP
trip characteristic for all protection functions as shown in Figure
Auto: Automatically reset once fault is cleared
6 2, (except the Thermal Overload function, as it has inverse trip
curve characteristic shown in Figure 6 3). Different reset modes can be independently selected for each
protection.
De nite TCC: The duration of the fault delay remains constant Note: Auto Reset is available only for Thermal Overload and under
irrespective of the changes in the value of the measured quantity voltage Protections.
(current), as described in the Figure 6 2.
Protection function is classi ed on the basis of following

Inverse TCC: The duration of the time delay varies inversely with parameters.
the value of the measured quantity. The possibility of damage Thermal
increases along with the measured quantity and thus the time
delay decreases. Current
Voltage
Frequency
Miscellaneous
XP
Motor Tripped
Thermal Protection
The fundamental protective function of the Relay is Thermal
Protection. Thermal Capacity of the motor is the tolerable
Trip Delay
capacity that the motor can withstand under overload condition.
Measuring parameter (X) In normal condition, the motor temperature will eventually
stabilize at some steady state temperature (within the limit) due
Figure 6-2: De nite TCC to ow of steady current. Under transient and overload
conditions the Thermal Capacity of the motor rises, but within the
corresponding limits. When the overload persists for a
1*104 considerable amount of time, the motor temperature and thermal
capacity will rise. A trip occurs when the thermal capacity used by
the motor reaches its 100 %.The Thermal Capacity of motor is
calculated by measuring the power circuit currents.
1000
Majority of the motor failures are due to overheating. There are
many reasons for increase in the temperature and Thermal
Time In Seconds
Capacity of the motor. Fault occurs mainly due to overload,

100 operation on unbalanced condition, poor ventilation, single
phasing, short circuits, Earth Fault etc,.
Overheating of the motor damages the windings hence decrease
Class 30 the ef ciency and life of the motor.
10 Class 25
Class 20
Class 15
Class 10
Class 5 Overload (49)
1 Overload is a condition where current higher than the rated value
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
MFLA ows to the motor resulting in excessive heating of the motor.
Rapid motor heating occurs during the overload, acceleration
Figure 6-3: Inverse TCC time, and stall condition. The Relay gives the Overload Protection

PROTECTIONS
based on calculated Thermal Memory (TM) and gives Trip The Relay thermal model follows IEC 60255 standard model. Trip
command when thermal capacity reaches its 100 %.The overload time is calculated using formula:
curve controls the rate of increase of the thermal capacity used
whenever the equivalent motor heating current is greater than I 2 Ip 2
current set point. The Thermal Memory is directly proportional to Ir Ir
ISET value, which is the overload current setting. tp = x ln
I 2 2
(k)
The Relay detects Overload condition and gives: Ir
An alarm when Thermal Memory reaches above the Alarm Set Where,
value.
tp: Trip time
Trip when Thermal Memory reaches 100%.
Ir : Rated current (ISET)
τ: Time constant
Pause Time Delay: Pause Time Delay is a con gurable time after
which the thermal memory will be reset to zero when the Relay k: Asymptotic Constant of value 1.15
trips due to Overload Protection. It is effective only when pause Ip: Current just before the overload current
time setting is enabled.
I: Actual running current
Thermal Memory Reset Value: It is the value of Thermal 1*104

Memory at which the trip condition due to overload is reset when
the Thermal Memory falls below the Thermal Memory Reset
Value. This setting is effective only when auto reset functionality
1000
in case of thermal overload is enabled.
Time In Seconds
Thermal Inhibit Setting: It is the setting for which the Relay will
100
continue to be in inhibit mode if Thermal Memory does not falls
below set Thermal inhibit setting value. In inhibit mode, the relay
will not detect any auto-start from current or will not allow to the
start the motor in case start command is given. This setting is Class 30
10 Class 25
available for editing only through Admin mode of MCOMP suite. Class 20
Class 15
Alarm Response for this protection can be separately enabled or Class 10
disabled. Class 5
1
Table 6-1 lists the overload protection settings available in the 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Relay. MFLA
Figure 6-3: Inverse TCC
Parameter Setting Range Step Increase Factory Setting
ISET 20 100 % of IFLC 5 % of IFLC 100 % of IFLC

Pickup Reset As per Hysteresis band 95
Alarm Set 80 100 % of TM 5 % of TM 95%

Alarm Reset As per Hysteresis band
Thermal Memory Reset Value 5 30 % 5% 20 %
Thermal Inhibit Setting 30 95 % 1% 33 %
Alarm Enable or Disable Enable

Pause Setting On or Off Off
Pause Time Delay 1 1200 sec 1 sec

Reset Modes Local, Remote, Communication, Auto Local
Table 6-1: Overload Protection Settings

PROTECTIONS
The tripping time depends on the trip class set in the Relay (class 5 trip, as shown in Figure 6 3, and numerically represented by
to class 40), which de nes time duration the Relay will take to Table 6 2.
Multiple Trip Class (as per 60947-4 Standard)

of ISET
5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40
1.151 851.68 1703.54 2555.4 3407.26 4259.12 5110.98 5962.84 6814.7

1.2 335.82 671.68 1007.56 1343.44 1679.32 2015.2 2351.08 2686.96
1.25 251.04 502.14 753.24 1007.34 1255.42 1506.52 1757.62 2008.72
1.3 204.46 408.96 613.46 817.96 1022.46 1226.96 1431.46 1635.96
1.4 150.52 301.04 451.58 602.12 752.66 903.2 1053.74 1204.28
1.5 118.76 237.54 356.32 475.1 593.88 712.64 831.42 950.2
1.6 97.42 194.84 292.28 389.7 487.14 584.56 682 779.42
1.7 81.98 163.98 245.98 327.98 409.98 491.98 573.98 655.95
1.8 70.3 140.6 210.92 281.22 351.52 421.84 492.14 562.44
1.9 61.14 122.3 183.46 244.6 305.76 366.9 428.06 489.2
2.0 53.8 107.6 161.4 215.2 269 322.8 376.6 430.42
2.25 40.58 81.16 121.74 162.32 202.9 243.48 284.08 324.66
2.5 31.86 63.74 95.5 127.46 159.34 191.2 223.06 254.94
2.75 25.76 51.54 77.3 103.06 128.82 154.58 180.36 206.12
3.0 21.3 42.6 63.92 85.22 106.52 127.82 149.12 170.42
3.25 17.94 35.86 53.8 71.72 89.66 107.58 125.5 143.44
3.5 15.32 30.64 45.94 61.62 76.56 91.88 107.2 122.5
3.75 13.24 26.48 39.72 52.96 66.2 79.44 92.68 105.9
4.0 11.58 23.14 34.7 46.26 57.82 69.38 80.96 92.52
4.25 10.2 20.4 30.58 40.78 50.96 61.16 71.34 81.54
4.5 9.06 18.12 27.16 36.22 45.26 54.32 63.38 72.42
4.75 8.1 16.2 24.3 32.4 40.48 48.58 56.68 64.78
5.0 7.3 14.58 21.86 29.14 36.44 43.72 51 58.28
5.25 6.6 13.18 19.78 26.38 32.96 39.56 46.14 52.74
5.5 6 12 17.98 23.98 29.96 35.92 41.96 47.94
5.75 5.48 10.96 16.42 21.9 27.36 32.84 38.3 43.78
6.0 5.02 10.04 15.06 20.08 25.1 30.1 35.12 40.14
6.25 4.62 9.24 13.86 18.48 23.1 27.7 32.32 36.94
6.5 4.28 8.54 12.8 17.06 21.32 25.58 29.84 34.1
6.75 3.96 7.9 11.86 15.8 19.74 23.7 27.64 31.6
7.0 3.68 7.34 11.02 14.68 18.34 22.02 25.68 29.34
7.25 3.42 6.84 10.26 13.68 17.08 20.5 23.92 27.34
7.5 3.2 6.38 9.58 12.76 15.96 19.14 22.34 25.52
7.75 3 5.98 8.96 11.94 14.94 17.92 20.9 23.88
Table 6-2 (1): Trip Delay as per Trip Class

PROTECTIONS
Multiple Trip Class (as per 60947-4 Standard)

of ISET
5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40
8.0 2.8 5.6 8.4 11.2 14 16.8 19.6 22.4

8.25 2.64 5.26 7.9 10.52 13.16 15.78 18.42 21.04
8.5 2.48 4.96 7.44 9.92 12.38 14.86 17.34 19.82
8.75 2.34 4.68 7.02 9.36 11.68 14.02 16.36 18.7
9.0 2.22 4.42 6.62 8.84 11.04 13.24 15.46 17.66
9.25 2.1 4.18 6.28 8.36 10.44 12.54 14.62 16.72
9.5 1.98 3.96 5.94 7.92 9.9 11.88 13.86 15.84
9.75 1.88 3.76 5.64 7.52 9.4 11.28 13.16 15.04
10.0 1.8 3.58 5.36 7.14 8.94 10.72 12.5 14.28
10.25 1.7 3.4 5.1 6.8 8.5 10.2 11.9 13.6
Table 6-2 (2): Trip Delay as per Trip Class
Note: Thermal Overload protection is always enabled and cannot be disabled in case of motor feeder.
At any given time while motor is in running condition, if Thermal Memory reaches 100 %, the relay issues a trip command.
Current Based Protection Step Factory

Parameter Setting range
Increase Settings
Over current Protection (50P)
Trip Enable or Disable Disable
Over current fault is a condition where the current through the
conductor (power circuit) exceeds its preset value. This fault is Reset Modes Local, Remote, Local
usually caused due to short circuit, load increase, improper Communication
connection, or ground fault.
Table 6-3 (2): Overcurrent Protection Settings
The Relay detects Overcurrent condition and gives:
An alarm when current in any of the 3-phases reaches above
the Alarm Set value. Under current Protection (37)
Pickup when current in any of the 3-phases reaches above the Under current fault is a condition where the current through the
pickup value and if the Pickup condition persists it trips after conductor (power circuit) reaches below its rated minimum value.
the Trip delay. Under current condition is observed mainly during No-load. Table
6 4 lists the Undercurrent Protection settings available in the
Table 6 3 lists the Over current Protection settings available in Relay.
the Relay.
The Relay detects Undercurrent condition and gives:
Note: At Starting time of the motor Overcurrent is disabled. An Alarm when current in any of the 3-phases goes below the
Trip and Alarm Responses for Overcurrent can be separately con gured Alarm set value.
through MCOMP suite or Display
Pickup when current in any of the 3-phases reaches below the
pickup value and if the Pickup condition persists it trips after
Parameter Step Factory the Trip delay.
Setting range
Increase Settings
Pickup Set 50 1000 % of IFLC 50% 100%
Pickup Reset As per hysteresis band 95
Alarm Set 90% of pickup set 90%
Alarm Reset As per hysteresis band 85
Trip Delay 0.1 to 10 sec 0.1 sec 0.1 sec
Alarm Enable or Disable Disable
Table 6-3 (1): Overcurrent Protection Settings

PROTECTIONS
Step Factory Table 6 6 lists the Earth Fault Protection settings available in the
Increase Settings Relay.
Pickup Set 30 85 % of IR 5% 50%
Parameter Step Factory
Setting range
Pickup Reset As per hysteresis band Increase Settings
Alarm Set 110% of pickup set 110% Pickup Set 50 100 % 5% 50%
Alarm Reset As per hysteresis band Pickup Reset As per hysteresis band
Trip Delay 1 to 120 sec 1 sec 10 sec Alarm Set 85-100% of pickup set 5% 90%
Alarm Enable or Disable Enable Alarm Reset As per hysteresis band

Trip Delay 1 to 30 sec 1 sec 1 sec
Trip Enable or Disable Enable
Reset Modes Local, Remote, Local Alarm Enable or Disable Enable
Communication
Trip Enable or Disable Enable
Table 6-4: Undercurrent Protection Settings Reset Modes Local, Remote, Local
Communication
Note: Undercurrent protection is disabled for the set starting time in the
Relay. Trip and Alarm Responses for Undercurrent can be separately Table 6-5: Current Unbalance Protection Settings
con gured through MCOMP suite or Display. Under current Protection
will be inactive for current less than 10 % of the set full load current.
Note: Trip and Alarm Responses for Current Unbalance can be
separately con gured through MCOMP suite or Display.
Current unbalance Protection (46)
Current unbalance is a condition where the current in the 3-
Phases differs in magnitude. Current unbalance is usually caused Earth Fault Protection (50N or 50SG)
due to load unbalance or improper motor windings. Large motors Earth current calculation is done in two ways in the Relay.
can sustain minor current unbalance in the circuit, but small
motors cannot.
1. Vector Summation
Current unbalance in the 3-phase circuits induces negative
sequence current, which generates negative torque causing the Earth Fault current is equal to the vector sum of the three line
motor to heat up. Negative sequence current affects the rotor by current values. It is calculated using formula:
increasing the copper losses and overheating. Current unbalance
Ie = Ir + Iy + Ib
also causes pulsating magnetic eld in the stator which results in
uneven force at the bearings thereby damaging the motor. Hence Where,
it decreases the ef ciency and life of the motor. Table 6 5 lists the Ie : Earth Fault current
Current unbalance Protection settings available in the Relay.
Ir : Current owing through R phase
The Relay detects Current unbalance condition and gives:
Iy: Current owing through Y phase
An Alarm when unbalance of 3-phase currents goes above the
Alarm set value. Ib: Current owing through B phase
Pickup when unbalance of 3-phase current reaches above the

pickup value and if the Pickup condition persists it trips after 2. CBCT (Core Balance Current Transformer)
the Trip delay.
CBCT is used for earth leakage and sensitive Earth Fault
Current unbalance is calculated using formula: conditions. The 3-phases supply to the motor passes through the
1. When Imax > 80 % IFLC: It is unbalanced if CBCT which senses the Earth Fault current under abnormal
conditions. The output of CBCT is used as an input by the Relay to
(Imax Imin) / Imax > Unbalance Set Value measure Earth Fault current. It is recommended to use
2. When Imax < 80 % IFLC: It is unbalanced if Manufacturer's supplied specially designed CBCT of ratio 2000:1
for MCOMP relay.
(Imax Imin) / IFLC > Unbalance Set Value
The Relay detects the Earth Fault condition and gives:
Where,
An alarm when earth current reaches above the Alarm Set
Imax: Maximum current of the 3-phases current
value.
Imin: Minimum current of the 3-phases current
Pickup when earth current reaches above the pickup value and
IFLC: Full load current if the Pickup condition persists it trips after the Trip delay.

PROTECTIONS
Step Factory In Locked Rotor condition, the rotor gets locked due to presence
Increase Settings of the excessive load. As a result, the motor draws higher current
Earth Fault Vector to drive the excessive load. The high current ow in the motor
Vector Sum or CBCT heats up the rotor quickly due to skin effect.
Type Sum
Pickup Set The Relay detects jamming of the motor after starting time and
20 500 % of IFLC 5% 25 %
(VS) gives:
Pickup Reset An Alarm when current in any of the 3-phases reaches above
As per Hysteresis band
(VS) the Alarm Set value.
Alarm Set Pickup when current in any of the 3-phases reaches above the
90 % of IEF 90 %
(VS) pickup value and if the Pickup condition persists it trips after
Alarm Reset the Trip delay.
As per Hysteresis band
(VS)
Trip Delay Table 6 7 lists the Locked Rotor Protection settings available in
0.1 60 sec 0.1 sec 5 sec
(VS)
the Relay.
Pickup Set
0.1 20 A 0.1 1A
(CBCT) Step Factory
Increase Settings
Pickup Reset
As per Hysteresis Band
(CBCT) Pickup Set 150 1000 % of IFLC 50% 400%
Alarm Set Pickup Reset As per hysteresis band
0.1 pickup set 0.1
(CBCT)
Alarm Set 90% of pickup set 90%
Alarm Reset
As per Hysteresis Band Alarm Reset As per hysteresis band
(CBCT)
Trip Delay Trip Delay 0.5 to 30 sec 0.1 sec 5 sec
0 60 sec 0.1 sec 5 sec
Run (CBCT)
Alarm Enable or Disable Enable
Trip Delay
0 25 sec 0.1 sec 5 sec
Start (CBCT) Trip Enable or Disable Enable
Alarm Delay Reset Modes Local, Remote, Local
0 60 sec 1 sec 1 sec
Start (CBCT) Communication
Alarm Delay Table 6-7: Locked Rotor Protection Settings
0 60 sec 1 sec 1 sec
Run (CBCT)
Alarm Enable or Disable Enable Note: Locked rotor protection is disabled for the set starting time in the
Relay. Trip and Alarm Responses for Locked Rotor can be separately
Trip Enable or Disable Enable con gured through MCOMP suite or Display
Reset Mode Local, Remote, Communication Local
Table 6-6: Earth Fault Protection Settings IDMT Overcurrent (51P/51N)

Note: Trip and Alarm Responses for Earth Fault can be separately This protection functions when the AC input current exceeds a
con gured through MCOMP suite or Display. predetermined value, and in which the input current & operating
In case of Vector Summation (VS), settings will be in % of IFLC and in time are inversely related to a substantial portion of the
case of CBCT, settings will be in absolute amperes. performance range. The time to trip is derived from standard
Time Inverse Curves. Two stages of IDMT over current settings are
available, which can be enabled individually or all at once,
Locked Rotor Protection (50LR) depending on the requirement. Available Curve types are IEC
curves as: Inverse, Very Inverse and Extremely Inverse.
Locked rotor condition can arise during motor starting time or in
motor running condition. Stalling in starting time is taken care by
Note: The working function remains the same for IDMT Phase Over
separate Excessive start time protection. Load jam in motor current Stage 1, IDMT Phase Over current Stage 2, IDMT Neutral Over
running condition is taken care by Locked rotor (50LR) protection current Stage 1, IDMT Neutral Over current Stage 2.
available in the Relay. Trip and Alarm Responses for Overcurrent can be separately con gured
through MCOMP suite or Display.
Locked Rotor current: The current drawn by the motor, when the
rotor is locked under full voltage condition. Rotor stalling is mainly
due to improper connection between the shaft and rotor, over
load etc,.

PROTECTIONS
Table 6-8 enlists constant values for IEC curves for dependent Phase Loss is usually due to internal causes like improper
time operating characteristics. connections in the circuit, blowing of one of the fuses, failure in
switch gear contacts and external causes like line breakages, etc,.
t = TMS [( k
I
)
I Pickup
a
] Due to loss of a single phase, the other two normal (healthy)
phases have to draw more current than the rated one to
Where, compensate the power. This increases the stator current,
t: Theoretical operate time in seconds consequently increasing the heat generated in the windings. This
leads to insulation failure which can cause further damage to the
k, α: Constants characterizing the selected curve motor.
I: Measured value of the characteristic quantity
I Pickup : Setting value The Relay detects Phase Loss condition and gives:
TMS: Time Multiplier Setting, Time Constant Pickup when one of phase current falls below 10 % of rated
current (IFLC) and if the Pickup condition persists it trips after
the Trip delay.
The constants, k has a unit of seconds, and α has no dimension.
Table 6-9 enlists the IDMT Over current settings available in the Table 6 10 lists the Phase Loss Protection settings available in the
Relay. Relay.
Factory
Curve Type Operating Time
Equation
t = TMS [( k
I
)
I Pickup
a
] Parameter Setting range
Step
Increase Settings
Trip Delay 0.1 to 30 sec 0.1 sec 1 sec
k α
Mode Enable or Disable - Disable
Inverse 0.14 0.02
Reset Modes Local, Remote, - Local
Very Inverse 13.5 1 Communication
Extremely Inverse 80 2 Table 6-10: Phase loss Protection Settings
Table 6-8: IDMT formula Note: When phase currents for all the 3-phases falls simultaneously
below 10% of set full load current, the Relay will not detect this
Parameter Step Factory condition as Phase loss.
Setting range
Increase Settings
Pickup Set 20 to 1000 % IFLC 5% 400%
Pickup Reset As per hysteresis band - Voltage Based Protection
Alarm Set 90% of pickup - 90% Over voltage Protection (59)
Alarm Reset As per hysteresis band - Over voltage is a condition where voltage in the power circuit rises
above its preset value. Over voltage occurs usually due to internal
Time Constant 0.5 to 600 seconds 0.1 sec 5
causes like switching surges, insulation failure, arcing ground and
IEC Curve Inverse, Very Inverse, Phase Loss.
- Inverse
Type Extremely Inverse
The Relay detects the Over voltage condition and gives:
Alarm Enable or Disable - Disable An Alarm when voltage of any of the 3-phases reaches above
the Alarm set value.
Trip Enable or Disable - Disable
Pickup when voltage of any of the 3-phases reaches above the
Reset Modes Local, Remote,
- Local pickup value and if the Pickup condition persists it trips after
Communication
the Trip delay.
Table 6-9: IDMT Overcurrent Protection Settings
Phase Loss Protection (47A)

Phase Loss Protection is also known as single phase protection.
Phase Loss is a condition in the 3-phase power circuit where one
phase of the supply is not available to the motor terminals.

PROTECTIONS
Table 6 11 lists the Over voltage Protection settings available in Note: Under voltage protection is disabled for the starting time set in
the Relay. the Relay. Under voltage protection will be inactive for voltage less
than 10% of nominal voltage. Trip and Alarm Responses for Under
Step Factory Voltage can be separately con gured through MCOMP suite or Display.
Increase Settings
Pickup Set 101 to 130 % of VN 5% 120%
Pickup Reset As per hysteresis band - Voltage unbalance Protection (47)
Alarm Set 95% of pickup - 95% Voltage unbalance is a condition where the voltage in the 3-
phases power circuit differs in magnitude or phase, or both.
Alarm Reset As per hysteresis band - Voltage unbalance would not affect the motor greatly. Voltage
Trip Delay 0.2 to 25 sec 0.1 sec 10 sec unbalance condition occurs because of variation in the loads,
unbalanced incoming supply, due to Earth Faults etc,.
Alarm Enable or Disable - Disable
Voltage unbalance leads to unbalanced current. The effects of
Trip Enable or Disable - Disable unbalanced current are explained under Current unbalance
Reset Modes Local, Remote, - Local Protection.
Communication The Relay detects Voltage unbalance condition and gives:
Table 6-11: Overvoltage Protection Settings An alarm when unbalance of 3-phase voltages goes above the
Alarm set value.
Pickup when unbalance of 3-phase voltage goes above the
Under voltage Protection (27)
pickup value and if the Pickup condition persists it trips after
Under voltage is a condition where the voltage in the power the Trip delay.
circuit decreases below 90 percent of its normal voltage. Usually
Unbalance in 3-phases voltage is calculated using formula:
Under voltage occurs during the heavy electrical demand (during
peak hours). [ (Vmax Vmin) /Vavg ] * 100 > Unbalance Set Value
Under voltage fault heats up the motor, it leads to winding Where,
insulation failure, this fails the motor permanently.
Vmax: Maximum voltage of the 3-phases
Vmin: Minimum voltage of the 3-phases
The Relay detects the Under-voltage condition and gives:
Vavg: Average Voltage of the 3-phases
An Alarm when any of the 3-phase voltages reaches below the
Table 6 13 lists the Voltage Unbalance Protection setting available
Alarm set value.
in the Relay.
Pickup when any of the 3-phases voltage reaches below the
pickup value and if the Pickup condition persists it trips after Parameter Step Factory
Setting range
the Trip delay. Increase Settings
Table 6 12 Under-voltage Protection settings available in Relay. Pickup Set 5 to 50 % of VN 5% 50%

Pickup Reset As per hysteresis band -
Setting range Alarm Set 90% of pickup - 90%
Increase Settings
Pickup Set 20 to 85 % of VN 1% 50% Alarm Reset As per hysteresis band -
Pickup Reset As per hysteresis band - Trip Delay 0.2 to 20 sec 0.1 sec 5 sec
Alarm Set 110 % of pickup - 110% Alarm Enable or Disable - Enable
Alarm Reset As per hysteresis band - Trip Enable or Disable - Enable
Trip Delay 0.2 to 25 sec 0.1 sec 5 sec Reset Modes Local, Remote, - Local
Communication, Auto
Alarm Enable or Disable - Enable
Trip Enable or Disable - Enable Table 6-13: Voltage Unbalance Protection Settings

Communication, Auto
Table 6-12: Under voltage Protection Settings

PROTECTIONS
Phase reversal Protection (47B)

Note: This protection will be inactive if frequency is less than 10% of
In 3-phase motors, the direction of motor is generally xed rated frequency.
according to the application. Motor will run in reverse direction Trip and Alarm Responses for Over Frequency can be separately
due to phase reversal. This condition is undesirable and leads to con gured through MCOMP suite or Display.
severe damage to the process.
Reversal of phases is mainly caused due to power interruptions in
the circuit. When motor receives power after frequent power Over frequency Protection (81H)
interruption, there are chances of reversal of phases. It may also
The Relay detects Over-frequency condition and gives:
occur when motors are disconnected for maintenance.
An Alarm when the frequency reaches above the Alarm set
The Relay detects Phase reversal condition of 3-phase voltages (if
value.
voltage connect is enabled) or current (if voltage connect is
disabled) and gives: Pickup when the frequency reaches above the pickup value
and if the Pickup condition persists it trips after the Trip delay.
Pickup and trips instantaneously when the phase sequence of
the motor supply is different from the proper set sequence. Table 6 16 lists Over frequency Protection settings available in the
Relay.
Table 6 14 lists the Phase reversal Protection settings available in
the Relay.
Setting range
Step Factory Increase Settings
Increase Settings
Pickup Set 101 to 105 % of FS 1% 10%
Phase Sequence RYB or RBY - RYB Pickup Reset As per hysteresis band -
Mode Enable or Disable - Enable Alarm Set 99% of pickup - 99%
Alarm Reset As per hysteresis band -
Local, Remote, -
Reset Modes Local Trip Delay 1 - 30 sec 1 sec 5 sec
Communication
Table 6-14: Phase Reversal Protection Settings
Trip Enable or Disable - Enable
Communication, Auto
Frequency Based Protection
Under frequency Protection (81L) Table 6-16: Over Frequency Protection Settings
The Relay detects Under-frequency condition and gives:

Note: This protection will be inactive if frequency is less than 10% of
An Alarm when the frequency reaches below the Alarm set rated frequency.
value. Trip and Alarm Responses for Under Frequency can be separately
con gured through MCOMP suite or Display.
Pickup when the frequency reaches below the pickup value
and if the pickup condition persists it trips after the Trip delay.
Table 6 15 lists Under-frequency Protection settings available in
the Relay. Advanced Features
Re-acceleration (27LV)
Setting range Re-acceleration is a method where the Relay restarts the motor
Increase Settings
automatically without user intervention for momentary voltage
Pickup Set 94 to 98 % of FS 1% 94%
dips.
Pickup Reset As per hysteresis band -
There are two cases in Re-acceleration:
Alarm Set 101% of pickup - 101%
1. Motor Re-acceleration function:
Alarm Reset As per hysteresis band - Voltage restores within 200 ms from the last voltage dip or
Trip Delay 1 - 30 sec 1 sec 5 sec no-voltage condition: If there is a sudden voltage dip in the
power source for a duration of less than 200 ms then the motor
should continue to run without any interruption. The output
Trip Enable or Disable - Enable contact of the Relay holds the contacts for 200 ms. The motor will
continue to run when voltage restores within 200 ms from the
last voltage dip or no-voltage condition.
Communication, Auto
Table 6-15: Under Frequency Protection Settings

PROTECTIONS
2. Motor Re-start function: Step Factory
Increase Settings
Voltage restores after 200 ms from last voltage dip or no-
voltage condition: If the voltage dip persists for more than 200 Voltage Dip 20 to 90 % of VN 5% 65%
ms, then the motor will stop. In this case, if voltage is restored
Voltage Restoration 60 to 95 % of VN 5% 90%
within the restart time, then voltage will be validated for restart
delay time. If the restored voltage persists for the set restart delay, Restart Time 0.2 to 60 sec 0.1 sec 5 sec
then the motor will restart. However, if the motor is tripped due to Restart Delay 4 to 1200 sec 1 sec 10 sec
UV fault during voltage dip condition, then after healthy
restoration of voltage, the trip will be reset and the motor will be Aux and Motor Supply Same and Separate - Separate
started. Table 6 17 lists the Re-acceleration Protection settings Mode Enable or Disable - Enable
available in the Relay.
Table 6-17: Re-acceleration Protection Settings
Note: Motor must be in running condition before voltage dip/no-

voltage condition occurs.
Presence of any maintained stop command at the time of restart
command from the Relay will inhibit starting of the motor.
Figure 6 4 shows the Re-acceleration ow chart with detailed working procedure of the Relay
New Voltage In New V<200 No drop off for

No
Motor Running Dip for within 1 second MCOMP DO
(Voltage Stable) < 200 ms of previous contact. Motor
(V<200) (V<200) continue to run
Yes Internal Timer starts

(upto 1 second)
Voltage Dip RESTART Voltage resumes RESTART

for >200ms TIME timer before RESTART DELAY timer
(V>200) starts TIME timer expires starts
RESTART DELAY timer Yes Is Voltage Dip before

reloads and timer starts RESTART DELAY and
again RESTART Time expires?
No
RESTART DELAY timer expires

and start command given by
MCOMP
Motor Running
(Voltage Stable)
Figure 6-4: Re-acceleration ow chart

PROTECTIONS
Temperature Monitoring
PTC
Increase in temperature of the motor is caused mainly due to over Resistance
Open Circuit Trip
current, locked rotor, single phasing etc,. Increase in temperature 10000
beyond the limit can cause insulation failure resulting in
permanent breakdown of motor.
Temperature Protection is provided in the Relay through RTD or Response
Resistance
Thermistor (PTC) input. These sensors are placed on the windings Response Open Circuit
Resistance Alarm/Pickup
of the motor where the temperature needs to be measured. A Trip Clear
Reset
single RTD measures the temperature in terms of degree Celsius. Resistance Response
In case of PTC, relay measures the temperature in terms of Ohmic Alarm/Pickup
Clear
value. Table 6 18 lists the temperature protection settings Short Circuit Trip
40
20 Short Circuit Trip
Time
The Relay detects high temperature condition and gives:
Figure 6-5: PTC protection working Philosophy
an Alarm when the temperature reaches above the Alarm Set
value. In case of PTC, if measured resistance goes above 10K , relay will issue a
trip command and trip cause will be PTC OPEN CIRCUIT. The alarm/pickup
Pickup when the temperature reaches above the pickup value value will be reset if the PTC resistance goes below set value of Reset
and if the Pickup condition persists it trips after the Trip delay. Resistance. If PTC resistance goes above set value of RESPONSE
RESISTANCE then the relay will issue a trip command and trip cause will be
Parameter Step Factory PTC RESPONSE RESISTANCE. The alarm/pickup value will be reset if the
Setting range
Increase Settings
PTC resistance goes below set value of Reset Resistance. If PTC resistance
Sensor Type RTD or PTC RTD goes below Short circuit Trip Resistance (20 ) then the relay will issue a
trip command and trip cause will be PTC SHORT CIRCUIT. The
Pickup Set (RTD) 25 180 ºC 1 100
alarm/pickup value will be reset if the PTC resistance goes above Short
Pickup Reset (RTD) Pickup Set 5ºC 95 circuit Reset Resistance (40 ). Table 6-19 shows the PTC Input
Alarm Set (RTD) Pickup Reset 5ºC 90 Speci cations supported by the relay.
Alarm Reset (RTD) Alarm Set 5ºC 85 Parameter Value

Trip Delay (RTD) 5 250 sec 1 sec 100 sec Response Resistance 2700 4000
Response Resistance (PTC) 2700 4000 50 3600 Reset Resistance 1600 2300
Reset Resistance (PTC) 1600 2300 50 1600 Short Circuit Trip Resistance < 20
Trip Delay (PTC) 0.1 60 sec 0.1 sec 0.1 sec Short Circuit Reset Resistance > 40
Alarm Enable or Disable
PTC Open circuit resistance > 10000
Trip Enable or Disable
Maximum voltage at PTC terminals Less than 7.5 V
Reset Modes Local, Remote, Local (R ptc = 4 K)
Communication, Auto
Maximum voltage at PTC terminals 30 V
Table 6-18: Temperature Monitoring Settings
(R ptc = open)
Note: Trip and Alarm response for Temperature protection can be Maximum number of sensors 6
separately con gured through MCOMP suite or Display.
Maximum cold resistance of PTC sensor chain 1500
RTD type which can be connected to the relay is PT-100. The relay Table 6-19: PTC Thermistor Input Speci cations
can measure the resistance from 100 to 175 ohm in case of RTD
connection which is equivalently shown in MCOMP display for
metering from 0 to 180oC. Any resistance greater than 175 ohm
seen by the relay will be shown as 0 ohm in temperature
metering. In case of Thermistor input, any PTC can be connected
to the relay. Maximum of 6 PTC can be connected in series and
given as an input to the relay.

PROTECTIONS
Maximum Number of Starts Protection (66) The Relay detects communication failure condition and gives:
Maximum number of starts protection prevents the damage to An Alarm when Relay does not receives any query from the
the motor on effect of frequent starts. This protection allows the master device for the set time delay.
motor to start only for a pre-speci ed number within a given Trip if communication failure condition persists for the trip
period. If the number of starts exceeds the set value, then this delay after generation of an Alarm.
protection keeps the Relay in inhibit mode, which prevents any
further motor start. Table 6 20 lists the Maximum Number of Table 6 21 lists Communication failure monitoring settings
Starts Protection settings available in the Relay. available in the Relay.
Step Factory Parameter Step Factory

Parameter Setting range Setting range
Increase Settings Increase Settings
Reference Period 15 - 60 min 1 min 60 min Time Delay 2 - 10 sec 1 sec 5 sec
Permissive Starts 1 30 starts 1 20 starts Trip Delay 1 - 30 sec 1 sec 5 sec
Inhibit Period 1 120 min 1 20 min Alarm Enable or Disable - Disable
Mode Enable or Disable - Enable Trip Enable or Disable - Disable
Reset Modes Local, Remote, - Local Reset Modes Local, Remote, - Local
Communication, Auto Communication, Auto
Table 6-20: Maximum number of starts Protection Settings Table 6-21: Communication Failure Monitoring Settings
Fail to Stop Protection Excessive Start Time Protection
In some cases motor fails to stop even when it receives stop Excessive Start Time Protection is necessary when the motor takes
command, in this condition Fail to Stop Protection is needed. This more time to start than the preset time. The motor draws high
may occur because of improper connections and settings. This current at the starting time (5-6 times of Full Load Current). If the
protection monitors the current after STOP output is set. If the 3- motor continues to draw higher current even after the starting
phase current is still present for two seconds after STOP output is time, it causes insulation failure and burning of the windings.
set, then a Trip will be issued on Fail to Stop Protection. The protection works on the basis of start time of the motor. It
monitors the current during the starting time and if it does not
Note: This protection is always enabled and cannot be disabled. follow the proper sequence then it will trip once starting time is
over.
Table 6 22 lists the Excessive Start Time Protection settings
Interlock 1 to 12 available in the Relay.
The Relay is provided with 12 interlocks and any digital input can
be con gured as an interlock. Each interlock input can be Parameter Step Factory
Setting range
assigned a function such as Alarm, Trip, Stop, Reset, etc,.which Increase Settings
will be executed on the absence of that interlock (low signal on Mode Enable or Disable - Enable
that con gured interlock). Interlock con gured as Trip causes the
Relay to trip in the event of absence of the corresponding Communication
Interlock.
Table 6-22: Excessive Start Protection Settings
Note: Interlock functionality can be separately con gured through the
Display or MCOMP suite.
Analog Input Monitoring
The two analog inputs available in expansion module supports 2
wire transmitter interface. The inputs supported are 4-20mA
Communication Failure Monitoring input or 0-20mA input. The metered value can be used trigger the
Communication failure monitoring provides the alarm and alarm/trip when it crosses the set threshold value. The transmitter
tripping action on failure of communication between the Relay converts the real world signal, such as ow, speed, position, level,
and the master device. The master can be either DCS or PLC or temperature, humidity, pressure, etc., into the control signal
SCADA. When "Trip only in Remote" setting is enabled, Relay necessary to regulate the ow of current in the current loop.
gives trip command only when motor is running in remote mode.
In case of motor running in local mode, Relay gives Alarm signal
only.

PROTECTIONS
Table 6 23 lists the Analog Input Protection settings available in Typical connection diagram for connecting the analog inputs in
the Relay. MCOMP expansion module is shown below. It is recommended
to use twisted pair cable for analog input connection.
Setting range
Increase Settings
Analog input type 4-20mA or 0-20mA - 4-20mA
Pickup Set 0 20 mA 0.1 mA 4 mA
MCOMP AI terminals
Pickup Reset 0 20 mA 0.1 mA 3.8 mA
Alarm Set 0 20 mA 0.1 mA 3.6 mA -ve +ve
Alarm Reset 0 20 mA 0.1 mA 3.5 mA

Trip Delay 1 to 30 sec 1 sec 1 sec -ve +ve +ve -ve
Alarm Enable or Disable - Disable

24 VDC supply Transmitter/Sensor
Trip Enable or Disable - Disable
Communication, Auto
Table 6-23: Analog Input Monitoring Settings

COMMUNICATION

COMMUNICATION
Overview Communication Protocol

The Relay has two ports for communication. The rst port is the Modbus RTU
local con guration port used to communicate with the Display
Modbus is a serial protocol which supports communication
and MCOMP Suite. This communication is on L&T proprietary
between a single master device and multiple slave devices. In a
protocol. The second port is to communicate with the higher level
Modbus network, the protocol governs how each IED shall know
system such as EWS/DCS/SCADA. This communication is on
its device address, recognize a message addressed to it, determine
modbus or pro bus protocol.
the kind of action to be taken, and extract any data or other
Communication interface is the physical connection on a device. information contained in the message. If a reply is required, the
Once the physical connection is established, the Relay IED will construct the reply message and send it using Modbus
communicates with the master on a protocol. protocol. Table 7 2 shows the Relay Modbus RTU port
connections.
This section provides a detailed description of Communication
Interface, Communication Protocols and Communication In the Relay, Modbus communication allows a Modbus Master
Architecture of different protocols used in the Relay. device to:
acquire metering, monitoring and event data from the Relay
Communication Interface control the Relay output contacts
The Relay communicates with higher level system using protocols. acquire the Relay le system data for diagnostic
Table 7 1 enlists the different communication protocols available
in the Relay. The selection of protocol depends on the application.
Communication Interface Setting range Setting range Setting range
RS485 Modbus RTU 4 pin connector Communication card

RS485 Profibus (DPV0, DPV1) DB-9 pin connector Communication card
RJ45 Modbus TCP/IP RJ45 female connector Communication card
RS485 L&T Proprietary RJ11 connector Controller card
RS485 L&T Proprietary Mini USB connector Display front
Table 7-1: Communication Interface
Note: The communication interface port in the Relay will depend on the selection of protocol at the time of ordering of the Relay.
Standard RS485 Connection Relay RS485

Standard Pin Description Relay Pin
signal required signal
1 GND Common Ground No NA NA
2 CTS+ Clear to Send + No NA NA
3 RTS+ Ready to Send + No NA NA
4 RxD+ Received Data + Yes 41,42 D+
5 RxD- Received Data - Yes 43,44 D-
6 CTS- Clear to Send - No NA NA
7 RTS- Ready to Send - No NA NA
8 TxD+ Transmitted Data + No NA NA
9 TxD- Transmitted Data - No NA NA
Table 7-2: Modbus RTU port connection

COMMUNICATION
Supported Modbus Function Codes The communication parameter settings available in the Relay are
shown below:
Table 7 3 lists of function codes supported by the Relay on
Modbus: Mode: It de nes the mode of communication (ASCII or RTU). The
Relay supports only RTU mode.
Code Description
Node Address: It de nes the node address of the Relay.
01 Read Coil Status (0X references, coils) Baud Rate: It de nes the speed at which the Relay communicates
with Modbus Master.
02 Read Input Status (1X references)
Parity: Parity can either be set as even, odd or none.
03 Read Holding Registers (4X references)
Stop Bits: Number of Stop Bits used can be set as one or two.
04 Read Input Registers (3X references)
05 Force Single Coil (0X references)
Modbus memory map
08 Diagnostics
Modbus RTU memory map enlists all the metering parameters,
Table 7-3: Modbus Function Codes trip & event record parameters, DI/DO status and coil status.
Function codes for different registers are also mentioned in the
memory map. The Modbus RTU memory map shows the
Modbus RTU Settings addresses for slow scan parameters (or parameters pre-de ned at
Modbus requires communication parameters such as baud rate, certain addresses). Refer Annexure A for Modbus RTU memory
parity, node address etc, are to be set for establishing successful map.
communication with the master. Table 7 4 shows Modbus RTU
communication protocol settings.
Pro bus DP
Parameter Factory Pro bus is an open, vendor-independent, eld bus protocol. The
Setting range Step Increase
Settings
Relay supports Pro bus DP-V0 for cyclic data exchange and DP-V1
Mode RTU RTU protocol for acyclic date exchange (read only) between master
Node Address 1 - 247 1 1 and slave devices.
PROFIBUS DP is a network that consists of two types of devices
Baud Rate 9600 - 19200 9600 9600
connected to the bus: master devices and slave devices. It is a bi-
Parity Even, Odd, None None directional network, meaning that one device, a master, sends a
request to a slave, and the slave responds to that request. Table
Stop Bits One, Two Two
7 5 shows Pro bus port connections in the Relay.
Table 7-4: Modbus RTU Setting
Standard RS485 Connection Relay RS485

Standard Pin Description required Relay Pin
signal signal
1 GND Common Ground No 1 NA
2 CTS+ Clear to Send + No 2 NA
3 RTS+ Ready to Send + No 3 NA
4 RxD+ Received Data + Yes 4 D+
5 RxD- Received Data - Yes 5 D-
6 CTS- Clear to Send - No 6 NA
7 RTS- Ready to Send - No 7 NA
8 TxD+ Transmitted Data + No 8 NA
9 TxD- Transmitted Data - No 9 NA
Table 7-5: Pro bus port connection

COMMUNICATION
Pro bus Settings RTU, however with a different physical layer (Ethernet). TCP
(Transmission Control Protocol) and IP (Internet Protocol) govern
Pro bus requires communication parameters to be set for
the data traf c control on the Ethernet media.
establishing successful communication with the master. Table 7 6
shows Pro bus communication protocol settings available in the In other words, Modbus TCP/IP uses a Modbus RTU message
Relay. transmitted with a TCP/IP envelope and sent over a network
instead of serial lines. The Server does not have a Slave ID since it
Parameter Factory uses an IP Address instead. Table 7 7 shows Modbus TCP/IP port
Setting range Step Increase
Settings
connections in the Relay.
Node Address 1 - 126 1 110
The Relay communicates on Modbus TCP/IP using RJ45 port. It is
Table 7-6: Pro bus Setting recommended to use Category 5 (Cat 5) or Category 6 (Cat 6)
without earth connection cable while connecting to MCOMP
The communication parameter settings available in the Relay are main unit.
shown below:
Node Address: To de ne the node address of the Relay.
Modbus TCP/IP Settings
Baud Rate: Baud rate is governed by the Pro bus master
Modbus TCP/IP requires certain communication parameters to be
set for establishing successful communication with the master.
Pro bus memory map Table 7 8 shows Modbus TCP/IP communication protocol settings
Refer Annexure A for Pro bus memory map and GSD module
details. The Relay supports Time synchronization using SNTP (Simple
Network Time protocol). To use this feature, the SNTP server
address and the proper time zone must be entered in the Relay
Modbus TCP/IP settings as shown in Table 7 8. The time zone is set as per user
location. In India, the time zone used is GMT+5h 30m.
Modbus TCP/IP shares the same application layer as the Modbus
Standard Pin Standard RS485 signal Description Connection required Relay Pin Relay RS485 signal
1 Tx+ Transmit Data + Yes 1 Tx+
2 Tx- Transmit Data - Yes 2 Tx-
3 Rx+ Receive Data + Yes 3 Rx+
4 NC Received Data + No 4 NA
5 NC Received Data - No 5 NA
6 Rx- Receive Data - Yes 6 Rx-
7 NC Ready to Send - No 7 NA
8 NC Transmitted Data + No 8 NA
Table 7-7: Modbus TCP/IP port connection
Mode (DHCP) Enabled/Disabled Disabled
IP Address 0.0.0.0 255.255.255.255 1 192.168.121.127
Subnet Mask 0.0.0.0 255.255.255.255 1 255.255.254.0
Default Gateway 0.0.0.0 255.255.255.255 1 None
SNTP Server Address 0.0.0.0 255.255.255.255 1 Two
Time Zone + 0 to 13 hours and 0 to 59 min 0
Table 7-8: Modbus TCP/IP Setting

COMMUNICATION
Modbus TCP/IP Memory Map 16 words, 32 words and 142 bytes can be con gured in
parameter mapping for Modbus serial, Modbus TCP/IP and
Refer Annexure A for Modbus TCP/IP memory map and
Pro bus communication protocol respectively. 16 and 32 words
parameter mapping.
which can be de ned by MCOMP suite HMI for Modbus serial &
Modbus TCP/IP can be polled using function code 4 at the
Parameter Mapping addresses 0001 to 0016 and 0001 to 0032 respectively. This
con guration of parameters can be done through MCOMP suite
Parameter mapping setting allows de ne/con gure the HMI.
parameters to be sent on communication networks (Modbus
serial, pro bus, modbus TCP/IP) in sequential manner/consecutive Table 7-9 shows the list of available inputs for con guring in
address as per requirement. The addresses for these mapped parameter mapping.
parameters are xed in case of Modbus serial and Modbus TCP/IP.
Availability in case of
Description
Modbus Serial Modbus TCP/IP Profibus
R Phase RMS Current √ √ √
Y Phase RMS Current √ √ √
B Phase RMS Current √ √ √
Earth RMS Current √ √ √
Average RMS Current √ √ √
R Phase RMS Voltage √ √ √
Y Phase RMS Voltage √ √ √
B Phase RMS Voltage √ √ √
Average RMS Voltage √ √ √
Frequency √ √ √
Power Factor √ √ √
Phase Sequence √ √ √
Total Active Power √ √ √
Total Reactive Power √ √ √
Total Apparent Power √ √ √
Total Active Energy √ √ √
Total Reactive Energy √ √ √
Number of Start √ √ √
Starting Time √ √ √
Starting Peak Current √ √ √
Hours Run √ √ √
Total Hours Run √ √ √
Trip Counter √ √ √
Trip Cause √ √ √
Digital Input Status √ √ √
Digital Output Status √ √ √
Truth Table Outputs √ √ √
Table 7-9 (1): List of inputs available in parameter mapping

COMMUNICATION
Description
Signal Conditioners Outputs √ √ √

Counter Outputs √ √ √
Timer Outputs √ √ √
Motor Status √ √ √
Expansion Module Types √ √ √
Expansion Module 1 status √ √ √
R-Y Line Voltage √ √ √
Y-B Line Voltage √ √ √
B-R Line Voltage √ √ √
Total Apparent Energy x x √
Temperature x x √
Thermal Capacity x x √
Number Of Stop Operations √ √ √
% Current Unbalance x x √
Trip cause Ext x x √
Motor Stop cause x x √
Motor Inhibit cause x x √
Status Word x x √
DI-DO/ Timer/ Counter- Signal Conditioner x x √
Logic Status √ √ x
Remaining Logic status √ √ x
Watchdog Register Status √ √ x
Internal DIO status √ √ x
External DIO status 1 & 2 √ √ x
Trip Record Trip Cause √ √ x
Trip Record Date √ √ x
Trip Record Time √ √ x
Trip Record IR √ √ x
Trip Record IY √ √ x
Trip Record IB √ √ x
Trip Record IEF √ √ x
Trip Record VR √ √ x
Trip Record VY √ √ x
Trip Record VB √ √ x

COMMUNICATION
Description
Trip Record Frequency √ √ x

Trip Record Temperature/Resistance √ √ x
Trip Record Power factor √ √ x
Trip Record Trip Cause 1 √ √ x
Status Word Communication Architecture

The status word available in parameter mapping in case of Modbus Architecture
Pro bus protocol can be con gured as per requirement. Each bit
Figure 7 1 shows typical architecture for Modbus RTU and
in the status word is open for user con guration. Table 7-10
Modbus TCP/IP. The Relays on Modbus RTU are shown to be
shows brief list of available inputs for con guring in status word.
connected in a daisy-chain con guration in which a master is
connected to multiple slave devices in a chain sequence.
Sr No. Parameter Category Name
In case of Modbus TCP/IP, the Relays are shown to be connected
1 Base unit DI-DO in a Star topology using Ethernet switches.
2 COMPlogic outputs (Truth tables, timer, counter,
signal conditioner)
Pro bus Architecture
3 Expansion units DI-DO
Figure 7 2 shows typical architecture for Pro bus. The Relays on
4 Protection/Monitoring function bits (Alarm, Pickup, Trip) pro bus are shown to be connected with the master in a daisy-
5 Internal bits (run, star, delta, forward, reverse, main, chain con guration.
high speed, low speed, Drive available, Motor status,
motor direction, permissive outputs, communication
commands, indicator outputs etc)
6 Watchdog register status (Individual bits)
7 Stop cause (Individual causes)
8 Inhibit cause (Individual causes)
9 Expansion unit failure status
Table 7-10: Brief list of inputs available for status word

COMMUNICATION
GPS Server for Time

Sycronization
To DCS on Laptop for
EWS STATION Modbus TCP/IP Parameterization
To DCS on (Redunbant)
Modbus TCP/IP
Serial Cable
RS 232
Ethernet
Switch Modbus TCP/IP
Data
Concentrator
Panel Area DAP serverTM
Ethernet Switch Modbus RTU Modbus RTU Ethernet Switch
Modbus TCP/IP Modbus TCP/IP

Loop No-01 Loop No-01
Switchboard Area
Modbus TCP/IP Modbus RTU
Figure 7-1: Typical Modbus Architecture
To DCS To DCS Laptop for

Parameterization
Pro bus - DP Pro bus - DP
Master Master
Serial Cable
Relay: RS 232
Pro bus - DP Pro bus - DP

Network Network
Switchboard Area Switchboard Area
Figure 7-2: Typical Pro bus Architecture

SETTINGS

SETTINGS
Overview motor to come to running state from starting state.
This section primarily consists of description of different setting The following Protection functions (both Alarm and Trip) are
parameters available in the Relay and basic instructions to feed disabled during this starting time:
those settings into the Relay in a very user friendly method. With Overload
the help of these instructions, the user can view/edit the Relay
settings to suit the application. Instructions are further supported Locked rotor
with the help of ow charts/graphics and step-by-step Under Current
procedures. The Relay settings are saved in non-volatile memory.
Under Voltage
Over current
The user can view/edit following settings as per the requirement:
Frequency: It is the nominal frequency supplied as detected from
System Settings R phase voltage input when Voltage connect setting is enabled.
Protection Settings System frequency can be selected either 50 Hz or 60 Hz.
Communication Settings Running current: It is the normal running current of the motor
as % value of full load current. Under current protection setting is
Digital IO Settings dependent on this setting.
Parameter Map Settings Input Voltage Selection: It allows selection of system voltage
COMPlogic Settings connection type as 3P-3W or 3P-4W. This setting is provided in
System setting window of MCOMP suite or Display and can be
selected as three phase-three wire (3P-3W) or three phase-four
Relay Setting Modes: wire (3P-4W). Upon selection, the Nominal voltage of the system
Display gets set in the relay accordingly.
MCOMP Suite In case of 3P-3W, VN = VL-L and
Communication in case of 3P-4W, VN = VL-L / 3,

where VL-L = Line to line voltage or Motor Rated Voltage selected
in system setting of the relay.
Setting Parameters
All the voltage based protection is dependent on VN and hence
System Setting Parameters proper selection of input voltage is necessary for the required
System setting determines the essential con guration parameters function.
pertaining to the general motor characteristics, method of Auto start and Stop detection: This setting is available for
starting the motor, different modes of starting of motor, etc. detecting the start and stop condition of the motor when relay is
Different settings available under this are as follows: used only for protection purpose without having any control on
starting and stopping of the motor.
Full load Current (IFLC): It is the maximum RMS current/rated
current a motor is designed to draw in normal running condition. Auto Start Detection: In an application where the relay is used
only for metering and protection purpose and not for control
Motor Rated Voltage (VL-L): It is the Average RMS line to line
operation, it is required to sense the starting of the motor
Voltage at which the motor operates at peak ef ciency. It is
through this auto start detection method. If enabled, the Relay
possible to directly terminate 480 VL-L voltages on the Relay.
senses that the motor has started when the average current
External PT is required for connecting voltages higher than 480
sensed rises from 10 % IFLC to 100 % IFLC within 100 ms.
VL-L to the relay.
Current Auto Stop: During running condition of motor and if
Auxiliary Supply (VAUX): It allows the selection of Power Supply
enabled, the Relay senses that the motor has stopped on
connected to MCOMP Base Unit. It is necessary to set correct
current auto stop cause when all the 3-phase currents falls
value of aux supply for calculation during power down mode.
below 10 % of set full load current (IFLC).The cause of the
Voltage Connect: If enabled, it provides voltage, power, energy motor stop can be seen through special commands in MCOMP
metering and allows detection of all voltage based protections. suite or display.
Frequency is detected on the basis of R phase voltage only. When
Voltage Auto Stop: During running condition of motor and if
disabled, voltage, power and energy measurement are not
enabled, the Relay senses that the motor has stopped on
available apart from voltage based protections.
voltage auto stop cause when all the 3-phase voltage falls
Trip Class: A numeric rating that correlates to the amount of time below 10 % of nominal voltage (VN).The cause of the motor
it takes to trip the motor when an overload condition occurs stop can be seen through special commands in MCOMP suite
according to IEC60255 curve. Refer table 6-1 for details. or display.
Starting Time: It is the maximum time allowed by the relay to the It is possible to start the motor through start command via digital

SETTINGS
input or communication even if auto start detection is enabled. START2. It can be started through communication as well if
required.
Starter Settings: This setting determines the type of starter used
to start the motor and their corresponding settings. Different When Star Delta is selected, two more settings to be set as
types of starters can be con gured as follows: given below:
DOL: Direct on line - This option is selected when motor is Time in Star: It is the time in seconds for which the Star output
started by DOL starter only in one direction using digital input is activated.
sources - START1 or START2. It can be started through
Change over Delay: It is the time interval between switching
communication as well if required.
from Star to Delta output.
RDOL: Reversible Direct Online Starter - This option is
TWO SPEED: This option is selected when the motor is
selected when the motor is started by RDOL starter either in
started by two speed starter using digital input sources Start 1
forward or reverse direction using digital input sources
and START2. It can be started through communication as well
START1, START2, START3 and START4. It can be started
if required.
through communication as well if required. START1 & START3
is used to run the motor in Forward Direction and START2 & In case of Two-speed starter, the IFLC and External CT ratio
START4 for Reverse Direction. setting is neglected and separate set of IFLC and external CT
ratio is provided. High IFLC and Low IFLC settings and
STAR DELTA: This option is selected when the motor is started
corresponding external CT ratio settings gets activated as
by Star - Delta starter using digital input sources Start 1 and
required.
Full Load Current 0.6 80 A (up to 600 A in 0.1 A up to 20A 1A

case of external CT) 1A afterwards
Motor Rated Voltage 380 800 V 1V 415 V
Auxiliary Supply 24, 110, 230 230
Voltage Connect Enable/Disable Enable
Trip Class 5 - 40 5 10
Starting Time 1 200 1 10
Frequency 50 and 60Hz 50 Hz
Running Current 20 100 % IFLC 1% 100 %
Input Voltage 3Phase-3Wire or 3Phase-4Wire 3Phase-4Wire
Auto Start Detection Enable/Disable Disable
Current Auto Stop Enable/Disable Disable
Voltage Auto Stop Enable/Disable Disable
Table 8-1: System Settings
Type DOL, RDOL, STAR DELTA, TWO SPEED

Time in star 1 to (starting time -1) sec Star Delta
Change over delay 0.1 200 sec 0.1 sec Star Delta
High IFLC, Low IFLC 0.6 80 A (up to 600 A with external CT) Two Speed
External CT ratio For High IFLC, for low IFLC Two Speed
Modes of Starting
Local Local1, Local2, Local3, Remote All
Remote Start 1 & 3 Local1, Local2, Local3, Remote All
Start 2 & 4 Local1, Local2, Local3, Remote All
Communication Local1, Local2, Local3, Remote All
Table 8-2: Starter Settings

SETTINGS
Modes of Starting matrix: Different starting modes can be When mode selection through communication is enabled then
con gured using con guration matrix as shown in Table 8-3. bits of Output Byte 0 i.e. 0.6 and 0.7 will be considered for
deciding the mode. The combination will lead to four modes as
START3 and START4 are used in RDOL, TWO SPEED starter.
mentioned above.
START1 and START3 are for forward, High Speed starts
When this setting is enabled, then mode selection can only be
whereas START2 and START4 are for reverse, low speed start.
possible through communication commands and any con gured
Selection of starting modes (L1, L2, L3 or R) depends on the status DI (Local/Remote_1 and Local/Remote_2 inputs) for mode
of mode selection bits available in communication (Output selection will be ignored. The mode selection will act as per status
Command Byte 0 - bit 0.6 and bit 0.7) or status of digital inputs of bit 0.6 and bit 0.7.
(con gured as Local/Remote_1 and Local/Remote_2). At any
When this setting is disabled, there will be no action on the mode
given time, mode selection is possible either through
selection even if the communication bits 0.6 and 0.7 changes its
communication or through digital inputs to the relay.
state. Mode selection then solely depends on the con gured DI
Corresponding setting Mode selection through
(Local/Remote_1 and Local/Remote_2 inputs) and will act
communication is provided in the relay which decides whether
according to con gured DI status.
mode selection is through communication bits or through digital
inputs statuses. Refer below table for mode selection.
Parameter Setting Range Factory Setting
Mode selection through communication: This setting is used
to decide the mode selection place i.e. whether the control for Mode selection
through communication Enable/Disable Disable
mode selection is with communication bits or it is with digital
inputs (Local/Remote switch on the panel).
Table 8-3: Mode selection through communication setting
Modes of starting Local 1 (L1) Local 2 (L2) Local 3 (L3) Remote (R)
Enable/ Enable/ Enable/ Enable/Disable
Local (Display/MCOMP suite)
Disable Disable Disable
Enable/ Enable/ Enable/ Enable/
Remote (Digital Inputs)
Disable Disable Disable Disable
START 1 (and START 2)
START 3 (and START 4)
Communication
Table 8-3: Modes of starting matrix
Local/Remote_1 OR Local/Remote_2 OR
Mode Functional Description
Comm bit 0.6 Comm bit 0.7
When in local1 mode, the relay accepts the start commands as per
0 0 L1
the configuration in that particular column.
0 1 L2
1 0 L3
When in Remote mode, the relay accepts the start commands as per
1 1 R
Table 8-3a: Mode selection

SETTINGS
Note: If there is no setting of local / Remote DIs & mode selection Display Password: This setting allows changing the value of the
through communication then the Local 1 mode will be followed by display password and available through MCOMP suite only.
default.
When mode selection from communication is enabled & Parameter Setting Range
Communication gets failed, then mode switches to Local 1 mode.
If only Local/Remote_1 is con gured in one of the digital inputs and Password 1111 - 9999
Local/Remote_2 is not con gured then only L1 and R mode will be
active. Table 8-7: Display Password setting
Four mode operation(L1,L2,L3,R) and mode selection through
communication setting is applicable only when Relay communicates
on Pro bus protocol and does not hold good for Modbus and Modbus
Mode Change: If enabled, when any of the con gured input
TCP/IP protocols. In case of Modbus and Modbus TCP/IP relays, normal
changes its state during motor running condition, the relay
two mode operation (local and remote) is supported.
generates the trip command. The modes of reset can be
con gured for this trip function.
External CT Ratio: For motor ratings having FLC higher than 80A Parameter Setting Range
(approx. 45KW), the relay requires external conventional
protection class CT s for sensing the three phase currents along Input 1 Base unit DI/DO input, Expansion unit DI/DO inputs
with its own current module. The external CT ratio mode needs to Input 2 Base unit DI/DO input, Expansion unit DI/DO inputs
be enabled for higher motor ratings and different parameters of
the external CT needs to be specify in the setting eld as shown in Mode change Enable/Disable
the Table 8-4 : Reset Modes Local, Remote, Communication
Parameter Table 8-8: Mode Change setting

Setting Range Factory Setting
Primary Current 2 1000 A 1A
NA Phase Selection: This setting allows selection of the number of
Secondary Current 1 or 5 A
voltage inputs connected to the relay i.e. two phase (R and Y) or
Mode Enable/Disable three phase (R, Y and B). In case of two phase input, the third
phase voltage is calculated from connected two phase voltages.
Table 8-4: External CT ratio setting
Refer chapter application notes for more details.
Latched Trip function: This setting allows selection of the trip
PT Ratio: For connecting voltages higher than 480 VL-L, the output functionality in case of relay s aux. supply failure. If
external PT ratio mode needs to be enabled and different enabled, the already energized trip output will remain active after
parameters of the external PT needs to be specify in the setting power recycle of the relay.
eld as shown in the below Table 8-5 : Feeder Type: This setting allows selection of the feeder type as
motor or heater feeder. Heater feeder selection is for non-motor
Parameter Setting Range Factory Setting load application i.e. MCCB/Heater feeder application. Refer
chapter application notes for more details.
Primary Voltage 1 800 V 1V
Motor Tag: In this eld the actual process tag for the
Secondary Voltage 110 - 230 V 1V
motor/feeder can be set.
Mode Enable/Disable
Start command through communication: This setting allows
Table 8-5: External PT ratio setting selection of start command as momentary or maintained.
In case of momentary, the start bits (bits of Output Command
byte 0 i.e. 0.0, 0.2) from communication will have below
Event Records: This setting determines whether the Pick Up, functionality.
Alarm and Trip event need to record by the relay or not.
Bit is 1 = issues start command depending upon the starter type if
all other conditions are healthy
Parameter Setting Range
Bit is 0 = withdraw start command and does not stop the motor
Pick Up Enable/Disable In case of maintained, the start bit (bits of Output Command byte
0 i.e. 0.0, 0.2) from communication will have below functionality.
Trip Enable/Disable
1 = issues start command depending upon the starter type if all
Alarm Enable/Disable other conditions are healthy
0 = withdraw start command and stops the motor.
Table 8-6: Event Record setting

SETTINGS
Parameter Setting Range Digital Input Features
Two Phase, three phase Digital Inputs accept 80-240 V AC/DC or 230 V AC/DC or
Phase Selection
110V AC/DC or 24 VDC voltage input for sensing depending
Trip latch Enable/Disable upon the ordering of the Relay.
Feeder Type Motor/Heater Validation period is a user con gurable debounce period
provided with each digital input in order to validate the
Motor/Feeder Tag Alpha numeric characters can be entered
authenticity of the signal.
Start command through Momentary/Maintained
communication
Digital Output Features
Table 8-9: System setting 2
All four Digital Outputs are potential free, change-over
contacts.
Protection Setting Parameters Digital outputs can be con gured as either pulse mode
Pl refer chapter 6 : Protection for details of protection setting (unlatch) or level mode (latch). In case of pulse mode, the pulse
parameters. width (hold time) is user con gurable.
Digital Outputs can be used to drive the main power contactor
without using any auxiliary contactors.
Digital Input Output Setting Parameters
This section provides a brief description about Digital
Inputs/Outputs for performing con gured operations. In addition, DIO Expansion Module
this section also provides information about DIO Expansion DIO Expansion Module is used to increase the number of DIOs in
Module used to increase the number of DIOs. the Relay. DIO Expansion Modules are available in two types:
4DI/2DO module
Basic Digital Input/Output 8DI module
The Relay is provided with six Digital Inputs and four Digital 5DI/2AI module
Outputs. DIOs are freely con gurable by the user as per the
3DI/2AI/2DO module
scheme. DIOs are hard-wired connections which enable the user
to remotely operate and control the motor. These DIOs have User can connect maximum three expansion modules to the base
following characteristics: unit. Table 8 10 gives the all the possible combinations of DIO
expansion modules that can be used in addition with the base
unit.
Single unit Combination

Expansion unit 1 Expansion unit 2 Expansion unit 3
Expansion unit 1
1 4DI/2DO X X
2 8DI X X
3 5DI/2AI X X
4 3DI/2DO/2AI X X
Two unit Combination

Expansion unit 1
1 4DI/2DO 8DI X
2 4DI/2DO 4DI/2DO X
3 4DI/2DO 5DI/2AI X
4 4DI/2DO 3DI/2DO/2AI X
5 8DI 8DI X
6 8DI 5DI/2AI X
7 8DI 3DI/2DO/2AI X
Table 8-10 (1): Expansion Module Combination matrix

SETTINGS
Three unit Combination

Expansion unit 1
1 4DI/2DO 4DI/2DO 8DI

2 4DI/2DO 8DI 8DI
3 8DI 8DI 8DI
4 8DI 8DI 5DI/2AI
5 8DI 8DI 3DI/2DO/2AI
6 8DI 4DI/2DO 5DI/2AI
7 8DI 4DI/2DO 3DI/2DO/2AI
Table 8-10 (2): Expansion Module Combination matrix
Digital Input Settings d. In case of Two Speed Starter, if input is applied, then
con gured Low Speed digital output is activated (provided
The following settings are used to con gure any Digital Input:
drive status is healthy i.e. ready to start).
Type: This decides the functionality of input. Each input type is
unique i.e. user cannot assign one Type to two Digital input.
Incase input is not used, Type is selected as NONE. START3 & START4:
User can select any of the digital input types as explained below: These types of input are applicable only in case of RDOL starter.
a. If L/R input is high and START3 input is applied, then
con gured FORWARD RELAY digital output is activated
START1:
indicating drive running in forward direction in remote
a. In case of DOL starter, if START1 input is applied, then mode. If L/R input is absent, FORWARD output will not be
con gured RUN digital output is activated (provided drive activated if START3 is applied.
status is healthy i.e. ready to start).
b. If L/R input is high and START4 input is applied, con gured
b. In case of RDOL Starter, if START1 input is applied, then REVERSE RELAY digital output is activated indicating drive
con gured FORWARD relay digital output is activated running in forward direction in remote mode. If L/R input is
(provided drive status is healthy i.e. ready to start). absent, REVERSE output will not be activated if START4 is
c. In case of Star/Delta Starter, if START1 input is applied, then applied.
con gured Star/Delta digital output sequence will start
(provided drive status is healthy i.e. ready to start).
STOP:
d. In case of Two Speed Starter, if START1 input is applied,
Stop is a reverse logic. For any type of starter, STOP input should
then con gured High Speed digital output is activated
always be present in order to start the drive. If input is removed,
(provided drive status is healthy i.e. ready to start).
then the drive stops immediately and goes to inhibit condition
until STOP input is released i.e. goes high. If the input is not high,
START2: relay inhibits the drive start.
a. In case of DOL Starter, if L/R input is high and START2 input

is applied, con gured RUN digital output is activated LOCAL/REMOTE:
(provided drive status is healthy i.e. ready to start). If L/R
L/R input is for deciding local and remote mode operation of the
input is absent, RUN output will not be activated if START2
drive. If the input is low, the relay takes it as local mode and drive
is applied.
can be started through START1 input in case of DOL & Star/Delta
b. In case of RDOL Starter, if input is present then con gured starter or START1 & START2 input in case of RDOL starter. Drive
REVERSE Relay digital output is activated (provided drive cannot be started through START2 input in case of DOL &
status is healthy i.e. ready to start). Star/Delta Starter or START3 & START4 input in case of RDOL
c. In case of Star/Delta Starter, if L/R input is high and START2 starter.
input is applied, con gured Star/Delta digital output If the input is high, relay takes it as remote mode and drive can be
sequence will start (provided drive status is healthy i.e. started through START2 input in case of DOL & Star/Delta starter
ready to start). If L/R input is absent, Star/Delta output or START3 & START4 input in case of RDOL starter. Drive cannot
sequence will not be activated if START2 is applied. be started through START1 input in case of DOL & Star/Delta
Starter or START1 & START2 input in case of RDOL starter.

SETTINGS
INTERLOCK 1 to 12: NONE:
Interlock indicates healthiness of the system. If any one of When selected for an input, no action for that particular input.
interlock becomes low, then relay acts as per the interlock
Mode: This setting is available only for Digital inputs: START1,
con guration done.
START2, START3 and START4. Mode de nes whether a particular
input is to be continuously monitored or momentarily.
ESTOP: Validation Period: Validation period is user con gurable de-
bounce period provided with each Digital Input in order to
Emergency Stop is a Reverse Logic. If input is removed or becomes
validate the authenticity of the signal.
low, the relay will STOP the motor. If this input is low, drive is
allowed to start if valid start command is present. Only on next Interlock Con guration: This setting is visible only when
high to low transition, relay will stop the drive through ESTOP. corresponding Digital Input is con gured as Interlock 1 to 12. The
Interlock can be con gured as:
Disable: No action will be taken on interlock.
CONTACTOR FEEDBACK 1 and 2:
Alarm: If the interlock is absent then the Alarm output will be
After drive starting, if contactor feedback is not available within
activated.
set contactor time , relay will stop the drive. During running
condition, if contactor feedback becomes low, then drive will be Trip: If the interlock input is absent then a Trip output will be
stopped immediately. activated after the set trip delay.
Contactor feedback 1 is for main contactor in case of DOL starter Interlock 1 to 12: If the interlock input is absent, Indicator 1
or FORWARD contactor in case of RDOL starter. Contactor output will be activated (if Indicator 1 is con gured as Digital
feedback2 is for REVERSE contactor in case of RDOL starter. Output for Interlock).
Local Reset: If interlock input is not present, then it inhibits Local
Reset.
RESET:
Communication Reset: If interlock input is not present, then it
This input is for resetting the trip condition of the motor when
inhibits Communication Reset.
modes of reset in any protection is selected as remote . If
motor is in trip condition and reset input becomes high, it will Auto Reset: If interlock input is not present, then it inhibits Auto
reset the trip. Under normal condition, if this input becomes high, Reset.
it will be simply ignored. For taking trip resetting action Input
Remote Reset: If interlock input is not present, then it inhibits
should undergo Low to High Transition.
Remote Reset.
Stop: If interlock input is not present then, it inhibits motor from
TEST: starting. Also motor will be stopped if running.
This input when high indicates relay is in test position. In test Interlock is considered for Test: If Enabled, interlocks are taken
condition, all the inhibit conditions gets ignored and start/stop into consideration when the Relay is put in TEST Mode.
operation can be performed to check control wiring in the
Interlock Trip Delay: It is available if any of interlock is
module.
con gured in TRIP Mode.
Reset Modes: It is available if any of interlock is con gured in
TRIP Mode. Reset modes are con gurable.
Parameter Setting Range Parameter

Type Start1 to Start4, Stop, Reset, Local/Remote, Estop, Contactor Feedback1,
Contactor Feedback2, Test, Interlock 1 to 12, None
Mode Momentary or Maintained
Validation Period 0.1 - 60 sec 0.1 sec
Interlock configuration Enabled or Disabled
Interlock is considered for test Enabled or Disabled
Interlock Trip delay 0.1 10 sec 0.1 sec
Reset Modes Local, Remote, Communication Local
Table 8-11: Digital Input Settings

SETTINGS
Digital Output Settings sec) if following conditions are satis ed:
The following settings are used to con gure any Digital Output: a. Drive is in stop condition
Table 8 11 shows the Digital Input settings. b. No trip condition
Type: This decides the functionality of output. Incase output is c. Thermal capacity is below threshold value.
not used, Type is selected as NONE. PERMISSIVE_OUTPUT (1 to 3):
User can select any of the digital output types as explained below: This output is activated when corresponding PERMISSIVE_
ALARM: OUTPUT command is received on communication from
PLC/SCADA/DCS.
Whenever there is an alarm/pickup condition, then Alarm output
is activated. TRUTH TABLE OUTPUT (1 to 16):
TRIP: This is logic status generated by truth tables which can be directly
assigned to energize the digital output contact.
If there is any trip condition (due to protection or interlock), then
Trip output will be activated and all start outputs (RUN or SIGNAL CONDITIONER OUTPUT (1 & 2):
FORWARD RELAY or REVERSE RELAY or STAR or DELTA or MAIN This is logic status generated by Signal conditioner which can be
or HIGH SPEED or LOW SPEED) will be dropped. directly assigned to energize the output contact.
FOLLOW: TIMER OUTPUT (1 & 2):
When selected, it follows the status of con gured parameter after This is logic status generated by Timer which can be directly
follow delay. assigned to energize the output contact.
RUN: COUNTER OUTPUT (1 & 2):
If starter type is DOL and if there is a valid start command (either This is logic status generated by Counter which can be directly
through MCOMP suite/Display or communication or DI), then assigned to energize the output contact.
RUN output will be activated (provided drive status is healthy).
NONE:
FORWARD AND REVERSE RELAY:
When selected for an output, no action for that particular output.
If starter type is RDOL and if there is a valid start command i.e.
forward or reverse (either through MCOMP suite/Display or Mode: There are two modes available for output,
communication or DI) then FORWARD or REVERSE RELAY output Level: The corresponding output is activated till next command to
will be activated respectively (provided drive status is healthy). drop the output.
MAIN, STAR and DELTA: Pulse: The corresponding output is activated for the hold time,
If Starter type is STAR/DELTA and if there is a valid start command which is user con gurable.
(either through MCOMP suite/Display or communication or DI), Hold Time: This setting is visible only in pulse mode. It is the time
then Star-Delta sequence follows as below. for which the corresponding Digital Output is activated when the
a. First Main and "Star" output will be activated. output is triggered.
b. After 'Time in Star' delay Star output will be dropped, then Follow Delay: This setting is visible only in FOLLOW type. It is the
after 'Changeover delay' Delta output will be activated. time to activate the corresponding Digital Output after the source
parameter is activated.
HIGH SPEED & LOW SPEED:
Heater Delay: This setting is visible only in HEATER type. It is the
If Starter type is Two Speed and if there is a valid start command time to activate the HEATER output after ful lling the below
i.e. high speed start or low speed start (either through MCOMP conditions:
suite/Display or communication or DI), then High Speed sequence
or Low Speed sequence starts respectively. a. Drive should be in stop position and healthy.
INDICATORS (1 to 12): b. No trip condition.
Indicator output will be activated when the corresponding DI c. Thermal capacity is below threshold value.
interlock con gured as INTERLOCK is low. The Heater Output is used in winding heating application. Table
DRIVE AVAILABLE: 8 12 shows the Digital output settings.
This output is activated when relay is not in inhibit condition and

drive is in stop condition. During running condition, this output
goes low stating drive is not available.
HEATER:
This output is activated after set heater delay (range is 1 to 3600

SETTINGS
Analog Output Settings If the value of selected parameter is less than or equal to
minimum set value, Analog output gives 4 mA & if the parameter
One 4 - 20 mA analog output is provided in the Relay which can
value is equal to or greater than maximum set value, it gives 20
be con gured to any of the parameter given in Table 8 13.
mA.
Parameter Setting Range Parameter
Type Alarm, Indicator 1 to 12, Follow 1 to 2, Run, Main , Start, Delta, Forward Relay,
Reverse Relay, Trip, Drive Available, Heater, High Speed, Low Speed,
Permissive_Output_1 to 3, Truth Table outputs, Signal Conditioner Outputs, Timer &
Counter outputs, None
Mode Level or Pulse

Hold Time 0.1 1000 sec 0.1 sec
Follow Delay 0.1 1000 sec 0.1 sec
Heater Delay 1 3600 sec 1 sec
Table 8-12: Digital Output Settings
Type Unit Min Max Step Size

R Phase Current A 0 3600 0.1 (0-20), 1(21-3600)
Y Phase Current A 0 3600 0.1 (0-20), 1(21-3600)
B Phase Current A 0 3600 0.1 (0-20), 1(21-3600)
Average Current A 0 3600 0.1 (0-20), 1(21-3600)
R Phase Voltage V 0 375 1
Y Phase Voltage V 0 375 1
B Phase Voltage V 0 375 1
Average Voltage V 0 375 1
R-Y Line Voltage V 0 375 1
Y-B Line Voltage V 0 375 1
B-R Line Voltage V 0 375 1
Apparent Power kVA 0 28.3 0.1
Active Power kW 0 28.3 0.1
Reactive Power kVAR 0 28.3 0.1
o
Temperature C 0 200 1
Frequency Hz 0 75 1
Table 8-13: Analog Output Settings

SETTINGS
If there is any error in factory set calibration of analog o/p then assign logical outputs as Digital outputs and also transmit
user can offset the error using Manual scale factor option (manual them over communication soft link on Modbus RTU, Modbus
calibration). Analog Output can be manually calibrated using TCP/IP, Pro bus for HMI/DCS applications.
manual scale factor option; by setting 'Expected Output' and
Figure 8 1 shows the general overview of COMPlogic:
'Actual Output' which is getting observed for selected parameter.
Considering the linear behavior in current output, we can nd out
the expected analog output current for applied input value of a COMPlogic Modules
parameter. Table 8-14 gives Manual scale factor setting of Analog
output. COMPlogic comprises of 4 modules:
Parameter Setting Range Step Increase COMPlogic Module Number of Modules
Expected Output 4- 20 mA 0.1 Truth Table 16
Actual Output 1 24 mA 0.1 Signal Conditioner 2

Timer 2
Table 8-14: Manual Scale factor settings
Counter 2
Table 8-14: Manual Scale factor settings

Communication Setting Parameters
Refer chapter-7: Communication for details of communication
setting parameters available in the relay. Truth Table
A truth table shows the output of a logical circuit for all
COMPlogic Setting Parameters combinations of inputs using logic gates. In COMPlogic user has
an additional exibility in customizing the logic according to the
COMPLogic is a part of the MCOMP suite parameterization application.
software. COMPlogic provides exibility to select any parameter
as an input of the Boolean modules and perform gate operation There are 16 Truth Tables available in the Relay COMPlogic.
to get desired output. The user can program the required logic 2 Input 1 output (Two tables)
using different modules such as truth tables, signal conditioners,
3 Input 1 output (Four tables)
timers, and counters. Different logic gates available in truth table
are AND, OR, XOR, NOR, NAND, and Custom mode. The user can 4 Input 1 Output (Ten Tables)
de ne its own logic gate using custom mode.
COMPlogic is an important feature used to build and execute Signal Conditioner
logical schemes within the Relay. Using COMPlogic a user can:
There are two Signal Conditioners available in the Relay
simplify existing physical complexities into simple logical blocks COMPlogic, each of which can be con gured to one of the
there by reducing additional hard writing following four types:
create cascaded logical blocks where output of one logical 1. Non inverting
block can be used as input of another logical block
2. Inverting
3. Positive Edge Latch
4. Negative Edge Latch
DI 1 Output 1
DI 2 Output of signal conditioner is triggered by conditioning input
either on,
DI 3 Level: by sensing level of input (high or low level).
Output 2
Edge: by sensing transition from low level to high level (+ve
Output 3
edge) or high level to low level (-ve edge).
DI 4
Timer Restart
Event/ Output Trip
Trip
Figure 8-1: COMPlogic Overview

SETTINGS
Input Down: A positive edge transition on this input decrements
the count.
Count limit is between 0 - 65535, roll over is not permitted.
Input
Reset: This input resets the counter output to low level and count
to zero.
Reset Limit: It is a maximum count limit at which counter output is

triggered. The limit range is from 1 to 65535.
The counter output will be set high once the count is equal to
Output
limit. It stays latched until the reset is high. For example set
counter limit to 4, Figure 8 3 illustrates the working of a Counter
NON-INVERTING with the help of waveforms.
1 2 3 2 1 1 2 3 4
Input Input Up
2 1 0
Input
Down
Reset
Reset
Output Output
INVERTING
Figure 8-3: Counter
There are two Timers available in Relay COMPlogic which can be

Input
selected from any one of the following four types.
1. Level triggered ON Timer
Reset 2. Rising edge ON Timer
3. Falling edge OFF Timer
Output
4. Rising edge OFF Timer
POSITIVE EDGE LATCH

Figure 8 4 shows a basic block diagram of a Timer.
Timer
Input
Input Output
Limit
Reset
Reset
Output Figure 8-4: Block Diagram of Timer

NEGATIVE EDGE LATCH
Level triggered ON Timer
Figure 8-2: Signal Conditioners Figure 8 5 shows operation of Level triggered ON Timer.
Timer triggers on input high level. After timer countdown, output
Counters triggers provided input still remains at high level. If input drops
before timer countdown, then the timer reloads as shown in
There are two Counters available in Relay COMPlogic. The
section-1.
counter output is generated based on the following inputs:
Section-2 shows that if reset is high during timer countdown
Input Up: A positive edge transition on this input increments the
then,
count. Count limit is between 0 - 65535, roll over is not
permitted. Timer is reloaded.

SETTINGS
Output is reset to low level. rising edge of input and remains latched even if input drops. After
timer countdown, output is set to low level as shown in section-1.
Section-1 Section-2
Before the timer countdown, if another rising edge of the input is
sensed the timer reloads as shown in section-2.
Input Section-3 shows if reset is high before the timer countdown then
the timer drops & reloads and hence the output drops. If output is
already high and reset is sensed before timer countdown then
output remains high.
Reset
If reset is high before the application of the input, output remains
at low level till reset drops as shown in section-4.
Time
Section-1 Section-2 Section-3 Section-4
Output
Input
Figure 8-5: Level Triggered ON Timer

Reset
Rising edge ON Timer
Figure 8 6 shows operation of Rising edge ON Timer.
Time
Timer triggers on rising edge of input. After timer countdown,
output triggers and remains latched even after input drops to low
level. Output drops when reset is at high level as shown in Output
section-1.
Before the timer countdown, if another rising edge of the input is Figure 8-7: Falling Edge OFF Timer
sensed the timer reloads and restarts the countdown as shown in
section-2.
Rising edge OFF Timer
Section-3 shows that if reset is high during timer countdown
then, Figure 8 8 shows operation of Rising edge OFF Timer.
Timer is reloaded. Timer and outputs are triggered on rising edge of input. After the
timer countdown, output is set to low level. If input drops before
Output is reset to low level.
countdown, then timer drops, reloads and hence output drops as
shown in section-1.
Section-1 Section-2 Section-3
Section-2 shows if reset is at high level before the timer
countdown, then timer drops and reloads.
Input Section-3 shows if reset is present before the application of input,
then output remains at low level.
Reset
Section-1 Section-2 Section-3
Time Input
Output Reset
Figure 8-6: Rising Edge ON Timer Time
Falling edge OFF Timer Output
Figure 8 7 shows operation of Falling edge OFF Timer.

Timer triggers on falling edge of input. Output is triggered on Figure 8-8: Rising Edge OFF Timer

SETTINGS
List of logical Inputs
Source of Input Name of Input Description

Start from Communication
Status bit will get Set on receiving START or STOP or RESET command over
Stop from Communication
communication.
Reset from Communication
Communication
Permissive_Output_1
These statuses are general purpose Set/Reset commands given from master
Permissive_Output_2
device over communication.
Permissive_Output_3
FIXED 0 Input fixed to 0
Fixed Levels
FIXED 1 Input fixed to 1
DI 1 to DI 6 Base unit digital input
DI 1-1 to DI 1-8 Expansion unit 1 digital inputs
Digital Inputs
DO 1 to DO 4 Base unit digital outputs
DO 1-1 & DO 1-2 Expansion unit 1 digital outputs
Digital Outputs
TT 1 to TT 16 Truth table outputs
SIGNAL CONDITIONER1 O/P
Logic Module Signal conditioner outputs
& SIGNAL CONDITIONER2 O/P
Outputs
TIMER1 O/P & TIMER2 O/P Timer outputs
COUNTER1 O/P & COUNTER2 O/P Counter outputs
MOTOR DIRECTION 0 for forward or Low speed & 1 for reverse or High speed
PICK UP STATUS 0 on no pickup or pickup reset condition & 1 for active pickup
INHIBIT STATUS 0 for motor healthy conditions & 1 for Inhibit condition
Motor Status Data ALARM STATUS 0 for no alarm or alarm reset condition & 1 for active alarm
TRIP STATUS 0 when no Trip or trip reset condition & 1 for active Trip
MOTOR RUNNING STATUS 0 for motor not running in any of the starter mode & 1 for motor
running in any of the starter mode
DRIVE AVAILABLE 0 for inhibit condition or running condition & 1 for ready to start i.e.
no inhibit condition
RUN In DOL starter ; this status will be 1 for high RUN output
In RDOL starter; this status will be 1 for high forward running output
Motor Status FWD RELAY
i.e. FWD RELAY
as per specific
starter Type In RDOL starter; this status will be 1 for high reverse running output
REV RELAY
i.e. REV RELAY
MAIN In Star Delta starter; this status will be 1 for high MAIN output
Table 8-15 (1): Logical Inputs

SETTINGS
Source of Input Name of Input Description

STAR In Star Delta starter; this status will be 1 for high STAR output
Motor Status DELTA In Star Delta starter; this status will be 1 for high DELTA output
as per specific
starter Type HIGH SPEED In TWO SPEED starter; this status will be 1 for high HIGH SPEED output
LOW SPEED In TWO SPEED starter; this status will be 1 for high LOW SPEED output
Indicator status will become 1 if status of corresponding Interlock input,

Interlocks INDICATOR1 to INDICATOR12
configured as Indicator is low i.e. "0
PROTECTION TRIP Individual protection & Interlock bits for showing TRIP status.
Protection Bits PROTECTION ALARM Individual protection & Interlock bits for showing ALARM status.
PROTECTION PICKUP Individual protection & Interlock bits for showing PICKUP status.
Table 8-15 (2): Logical Inputs
Relay Con guration 8. Change the value using Up, Down navigation keys.
Relay Con guration through the Display 9. Press ENT to con rm the selected value.
The Display is designed to be compatible with the Relay. The 10. Press Return to save the changed value with option as
Display also serves as a medium between the Relay and MCOMP YES/NO.
Suite using mini USB cable readily available as phone charging 11. Select YES and press ENT to con rm the save.
cable. Settings can be done by using the Display as described
below and shown in the following ow chart: 12. Press Return for save message con rmation. After successful
saving, a pop up window will appear showing message as
SAVED . At this stage, the PWR/COMM LED turns On
Procedure to con gure the IFLC value using the Display: in the following sequence: Green-Orange-Green.
1. Press ENT button to move from metering parameter view to 13. Press Return key till Settings menu screen appears.
menu window. 14. Use Up, Down keys to go to commands menu.
2. Use Left, Right navigation keys to go to settings menu. 15. Press ENT to go inside the commands menu.
3. Press ENT to inside settings menu. 16. Enter correct password using navigation keys to proceed
4. Enter correct password using navigation keys to proceed further.
further. Default password is 1111. 17. Use Up, Down keys to go to the MCOMP reset option.
5. Press ENT to go into system settings. 18. Press ENT to send the command for MCOMP reset. One can
6. Press ENT to go into IFLC setting. also do a power recycle of the MCOMP main unit instead of
sending MCOMP reset command through display. This will
7. Press ENT to edit the IFL value.
put the new settings into effect.

SETTINGS
Ir : 0.0A Metering Settings
Iy : 0.0A ENT <>

Ib : 0.0A
Iavg : 0.0A
ENT
Settings PASSWORD Settings

System ENT Edit
<>
ENT
Protection X X X X View
Digital I/O
ENT
System Full Load Current Full Load Current

ENT ENT
Full load Current I c : 10.1A I c : 10.1A
Motor Voltage
Auxiliary Supply
SAVE? Full Load Current Full Load Current

YES I c : 11.0A ENT I c : 11.0A
NO
ENT
System Settings Settings

Full load Current Sy Edit
SAVED
Motor Voltage P View
Auxiliary Supply Digital I/O
COMMANDS Settings
PASSWORD
<>
ENT
X X X X
<>
ENT
Commands Commands Commands

<>
Motor Start 1 Motor Start 2 ENT Motor Start 2

CMD Sent
Motor Start 2 Motor Stop Motor Stop
Motor Stop MCOMP Reset MCOMP Reset
Figure 8-: Display operating procedure

SETTINGS
Relay Con guration through MCOMP suite Procedure to con gure the IFLC value using MCOMP Suite:
MCOMP Suite is a software developed for local parameterization 1. Open MCOMP Suite window and switch to Con guration
and monitoring of the Relay. MCOMP Suite provides a user mode.
friendly environment for con guration and parameterization of
the Relay.
2. Press Read All to read all the settings before changing the
settings.

SETTINGS
3. After successful read, press System Settings to get the
following screen.
4. Press Motor Settings, change IFLC value by choosing a

required value from drop down button, next to the IFLC value bar
and press Write All.

SETTINGS
5. If user is in Admin Mode, online changes in settings are directly
saved after writing the settings. If user is in Supervisor Mode
user needs to reset MCOMP after using Write All option.
Procedure to save the settings in Supervisor Mode is:
Monitoring Window Special Commands Reset MCOMP Send
Relay Con guration through Communication thermistor inputs for temperature sensing. MPR shall take CBCT
inputs for sensitive earth fault detection of 2A. The motor details
The Relay consists of three communication protocols: Pro bus,
speci ed by motor manufacturer are:
Modbus RTU and Modbus TCP/IP. Out of these three
communication protocols, only Modbus TCP/IP can be used for Full load Current = 53 A, Voltage = 415 V, Frequency = 50 Hz
remote parameterization over communication. Each parameter Locked Rotor Current = 600 % FLC
has its own holding register address (Function Code 03). Holding
register address for each parameter is shown in Modbus TCP/IP Starting time at 100% full load = 0.2 second
Memory Map. Type of Starting = Direct On Line
Procedure to con gure the IFLC value through Communication:
1. Refer Modbus TCP/IP memory map for holding register address Solution:
of the particular parameter.
Selection of MCOMP Relay:
2. Poll particular register (40151) of IFLC to see the current value
Referring to MCOMP Order Codes, following part numbers can
of IFLC.
be selected.
3. Write required value of IFLC by considering scaling factor.
Main unit: MCOMP_MAIN_UNIT_U_T_YI_P
4. Poll the IFLC register.
Current Module: MCOMP_CURRENT_MODULE_C5_1
Display unit: MCOMP_DISPLAY_UNIT_D1_1
Examples of Relay Selection and Basic Settings using
Motor data Above selected relay main unit have universal aux supply, Modbus
TCP/IP communication, universal DI sensing voltage and
Case 1: thermistor (PTC) input port. Current module is type-5 which
In an appapplication, a Motor Protection Relay (MPR) is required covers full load current of 53 A with 1meter CM cable. Display
for 30 kW motor with 5DI and 4DO. MPR shall work on 230 VAC unit is selected of 240 aux supply with 1 meter display cable for
supply, shall show all the metering values on the local panel and local panel metering. Expansion module part number is not
shall be communicable on Modbus TCP/IP. MPR shall accept selected as DI/DO requirement is ful lled by main unit itself.

SETTINGS
To navigate to the motor Settings, follow the path shown below:
Settings System Motor Refer

(Con guration Mode) Settings Settings Figure 8-1
Settings System Starter Refer

Settings Protection Locked Refer

(Con guration Mode) Settings Rotor Figure 8-1
Settings Protection Earth Refer

(Con guration Mode) Settings Fault Figure 8-1
Case 2: Solution:
In an application, a Motor Protection Relay (MPR) is required for Selection of MCOMP Relay:
90kW motor with 9DI and 5DO. MPR shall work on 230VAC
As the required motor FLC is more than 81A, we need to use
supply, shall show all the metering values on the local panel and
external conventional CTs along with MCOMP CM. The external
shall be communicable on Pro bus. MPR shall accept RTD input
CTs should be chosen such that FLC of the motor falls in 50% to
for temperature sensing. The motor details speci ed by motor
100% of external CT primary. Since FLC is 162 A, a 200 :1 or
manufacturer are:
200:5 CT may be chosen. Let us choose 200:1 CT. The MCOMP
Full load Current = 162A, Voltage = 415V, Frequency = 50 Hz CM selection will depend on conventional CT secondary. For 1A
and 5A secondary, the required CM should be CM1 and CM2
Locked Rotor Current = 600 % FLC
respectively. So CM1 is required. The expansion unit of 4DI/2DO
Max Starting time = 1 sec along with relay main unit will serve the 9DI/5DO requirement.
Type of Starting = Reverse Direct On Line Referring to MCOMP Order Codes, following part numbers can
be selected.

SETTINGS
Main unit: MCOMP_MAIN_UNIT_U_P_YI_R
Current Module: MCOMP_CURRENT_MODULE_C1_1
Display unit: MCOMP_DISPLAY_UNIT_D1_1
Expansion Unit: MCOMP_EXPANSION_UNIT_A_YI_1
Basic settings to be done in the Relay as:
Settings System Motor Refer

Settings System Starter Refer

Settings Protection Locked Refer

(Con guration Mode) Settings Rotor Figure 8-2
Settings Protection External Refer

(Con guration Mode) Settings CT Ratio Figure 8-2

SETTINGS
Setting Sheet
System Settings
Motor Tag
Motor Tag (10 characters) =____________________
Motor Settings
Full Load Current (IFLC) 0.6 600 A =____________________
Motor Rated Voltage (VL-L) 380 800 V =____________________
Auxiliary Supply (VAUX) 24, 110, 230 V =____________________
Voltage Connect Enable or Disable =____________________
Trip Class Class 5 - 40 =____________________
Starting Time 1 200 seconds =____________________
Frequency 50 or 60 Hz =____________________
Running Current 20 100 % IFLC =____________________
3 Phase - 3 Wire or
Input Voltage =____________________
3 Phase 4 Wire
Auto Start detection Enable or Disable =____________________

Current Auto Stop Enable or Disable =____________________
Voltage Auto Stop Enable or Disable =____________________
Starter Settings
Type DOL, RDOL, STAR/DELTA, TWO SPEED =____________________
Time in Star 1 to (starting time -1) seconds =____________________

(Visible if Type = STAR/DELTA)
Change Over Delay 0.1 200 seconds =____________________

(Visible if Type = STAR/DELTA)
High Speed IFLC 0.6 600 A =____________________

(Visible if Type = TWO SPEED)
Low Speed IFLC 0.6 600 A =____________________

(Visible if Type = TWO SPEED)
Modes of Starting Local and Remote =____________________

Local_L Enable or Disable =____________________
Local_R Enable or Disable =____________________
Remote_Start1_L, Remote_Start2_R Enable or Disable =____________________
Remote_Start1_L, Remote_Start2_R Enable or Disable =____________________
Remote_Start1&2_L =____________________
Enable or Disable
(Visible if Type = RDOL)
Remote_Start3&4_R =____________________
Enable or Disable
(Visible if Type = RDOL)
Communication_L Enable or Disable =____________________
Table 8-16 (1): System settings

SETTINGS
Event Records
Communication_R Enable or Disable =____________________
Pick Up Enable or Disable =____________________
Trip Enable or Disable =____________________
Alarm Enable or Disable =____________________
Display password
Admin 1111 - 9999 =____________________
External CT Ratio
Primary Current 1 1000 A =____________________
Secondary Current 1A or 5A =____________________
Mode Enable or Disable =____________________
PT Ratio
Primary Voltage 1 800 V =____________________
Secondary Voltage 110 230 V =____________________
PT Ratio Enable Enable or Disable =____________________
Mode Change
Input 1 Freely Programmable =____________________
Mode Enable or Disable =________________________
Phase Selection
Phase Selection Two Phase or Three Phase =____________________
Latched Trip
Latched Trip Enable or Disable =____________________
Feeder Type
Feeder Type Motor or Non Motor =____________________
Table 8-16 (2): System settings

SETTINGS
Protection Settings
Overload
Current Set (ISET) 20 100 % IFLC =____________________

Pickup Set 100 % ITM =____________________
Alarm Set 80 100 % ITM =____________________
Thermal Memory Enabled =____________________
Thermal Memory Reset Value 5 30 % ITM =____________________
Thermal Inhibit Setting 30 95 % ITM =____________________
Pause Setting Enable or Disable =____________________
Pause Time Delay 1 1200 seconds =____________________
Reset Modes Local, Remote, Auto, Communication =____________________
Alarm Mode Enable or Disable =____________________
Over Current
Pickup Set 50 1000 % IFLC =____________________

Alarm Set 90% of pickup =____________________
Trip Delay 0.1 10 seconds =____________________
Rest Modes Local, Remote, Communication =____________________
Trip Mode Enable or Disable =____________________
Under Current
Pickup Set 30 85 % IR =____________________

Alarm Set 110 % of pickup =____________________
Current Unbalance
Pickup Set 5 100 % IFLC =____________________

Alarm Set 85 100 % of pickup =____________________
Trip Delay 1 30 seconds =____________________
Earth Fault
Earth Fault Type VECTOR_SUM or CBCT =________________________
Pickup Set (Ief) 20 500 % IFLC =____________________

(Visible if Earth Fault Type = VECTOR_SUM)
Table 8-17 (1): Protection settings

SETTINGS
Pickup Set (Ief) =____________________

0.1 20 A
(Visible if Earth Fault Type = CBCT)
Alarm Set =____________________

90% of pickup
(Visible if Earth Fault Type = VECTOR_SUM)
Alarm Set =____________________

0.1 Pickup set value A
Trip Delay (Run) 0 60 seconds =____________________
Trip Delay (Start) 0 25 seconds =____________________

Alarm Delay (Run) 0 60 seconds =____________________

Alarm Delay (Start) 0 60 seconds =____________________


Locked Rotor
Pickup Set 150 1000 % IFLC =____________________
Alarm Set 90% of Pickup =____________________
Reset Modes Local, Remote, Communication =____________________
IDMT Overcurrent (Stage 1 and 2)
Pickup Set 20 1000 % IFLC =____________________
Time Constant 0.5 600 seconds =____________________
Curve Type Inverse, Very Inverse, Extremely Inverse =____________________
Over Voltage
Pickup Set 101 130 % VN =____________________
Alarm Set 95% of Pickup =____________________
Trip Delay 0.2 25 seconds =________________________

Under Voltage
Pickup Set 20 85 % VN =____________________

SETTINGS
Alarm Set 110 % of Pickup =____________________
Reset Modes Local, Remote, Communication, Auto =____________________

Voltage Unbalance
Pickup Set 5 50 % VN =____________________
Phase Reversal
Phase Sequence RYB or RBY =____________________
Reset modes Local, Remote, Communication =____________________
Phase Loss
Over Frequency
Pickup Set 101 105 % FS =____________________

Under Frequency
Pickup Set 94 98 % FS =____________________

Trip Mode Enable or Disable =________________________
Re-acceleration
Voltage Dip 20 90 % VN =____________________
Voltage Restoration 65 95 % VN =____________________
Restart Time 0.2 60 seconds =____________________
Restart Delay 4 1200 seconds =____________________

SETTINGS
Aux and Motor Supply Same or separate =____________________

Communication Failure
Time Delay 2 10 seconds =____________________
Reset Modes Local, Remote, Auto =____________________
Trip only in Remote Enable or Disable =____________________
Excessive Start Time
Maximum Number of Starts
Reference Period 15 60 minutes =____________________
Permissive Starts 1 30 starts =____________________
Inhibit Period 1 120 minutes =____________________
Temperature
Sensor Type RTD (PT-100) or Thermistor(PTC) =____________________
Pickup Set =____________________

25 180 oC
(Visible if Sensor Type = RTD(PT-100))
Pickup Reset =____________________

Pickup Set Value 5 oC
Alarm Set =____________________

Pickup Reset Value 5 oC
Alarm Reset =____________________

Alarm Set Value 5 oC
Trip Delay =____________________

5 250 seconds
Response Resistance =____________________

2700 4000 ohm
(Visible if Sensor Type = Thermistor(PTC))
Reset Resistance =____________________

1600 2300 ohm
Trip Delay =________________________

0.1 60 seconds


SETTINGS
Hysteresis Band
Current 3 15 % =____________________
Voltage 3 15 % =____________________
Frequency 1 15 % =____________________
Communication Settings
Protocol Selection Modbus, Profibus, Modbus TCP/IP =____________________
Modbus (Visible if Protocol Selection = Modbus)
Mode RTU =____________________
Node Address 1 247 =____________________
Baud Rate 9600 or 19200 =____________________
Parity None, Even, Odd =____________________
Stop Bits One, Two =____________________
Profibus (Visible if Protocol Selection = Profibus)
Node Address 1 126 =____________________
Modbus TCP/IP (Visible if Protocol Selection = Modbus TCP/IP)
DHCP Mode Enable or Disable =____________________
IP Address 0.0.0.0 255.255.255.255 =____________________
Subnet Mask 0.0.0.0 255.255.255.255 =____________________
Default Gateway 0.0.0.0 255.255.255.255 =____________________
SNTP Server Address 0.0.0.0 255.255.255.255 =____________________
Time Zone (GMT) +/-, 0 - 13 hours, 0 59 minutes =____________________
Table 8-18: Communication settings
DIO Settings (Digital Input/Output)
IO Settings
Input 1
Start1, Start2, Start3, Start4, Reset,

Stop, Estop, Local/Remote, Interlock1
Type to Interlock12, Contactor Feedback1, =____________________
Contactor Feedback2, Test, Logical
Inputs, None
Mode
(Visible if Type = Start1 or Start2 or Maintained or Momentary =____________________
Start3 or Start4)
Table 8-19 (1): DIO settings

SETTINGS
Validation Period
(Hidden if Type = None or Contactor Feedback1 0.1 60 seconds =____________________
or Contactor Feedback2)
Contactor Time
(Visible if Contactor Feedback1 or 0.1 60 seconds =____________________
Contactor Feedback2)
Disable, Alarm, Trip, Interlock1 to

Interlock Config
(Visible if Type = Interlock 1 to Interlock 12) Interlock12, Local Reset, Remote Reset, =____________________
Auto Reset, Communication Reset, Stop
Interlock Trip Delay 0.1 10 seconds =____________________

(Visible if Interlock Config = Trip)

Interlock Considered for Test Enable or Disable =____________________

(Visible if Interlock Config = Stop)
Input 2

Inputs, None
Mode
Start3 or Start4)
Validation Period
Contactor Time

Interlock Config =____________________
Interlock12, Local Reset, Remote Reset,
(Visible if Type = Interlock 1 to Interlock 12)




SETTINGS
Input 3

Inputs, None
Mode
Start3 or Start4)
Validation Period
Contactor Time

Interlock Config



Input 4

Inputs, None
Mode
Start3 or Start4)
Validation Period
Contactor Time
Interlock Config Disable, Alarm, Trip, Interlock1 to

Interlock12, Local Reset, Remote Reset, =____________________

SETTINGS
Interlock Trip Delay =____________________

0.1 10 seconds
Reset Modes =____________________

Local, Remote, Communication
Interlock Considered for Test =____________________

Enable or Disable
Input 5

Inputs, None
Mode
Start3 or Start4)
Validation Period
Contactor Time

Interlock Config



Input 6

Inputs, None
Mode
Start3 or Start4)
Validation Period

SETTINGS
Contactor Time




Output 1
Run, Forward Relay, Reverse Relay,

Follow1, Follow2, Alarm, Trip, Main,
Star, Delta, Indicator1 to 12, Drive
Available, Heater, Truth Table o/p 1
to Truth Table o/p 16, Timer 1 o/p, =____________________
Type
Timer 2 o/p, Counter 1 o/p, Counter 2
o/p, Signal Conditioner 1 o/p, Signal
Conditioner 2 o/p, Permissive o/p 1 to
Permissive o/p 3, High Speed, Low
Speed, None
Mode =____________________
Level or Pulse
(Hidden if Type = None)
Hold Time =____________________

0.1 1000 seconds
(Visible if Mode = Pulse)
Follow Delay =____________________

0.1 1000 seconds
(Visible if Type = Follow 1 or Follow 2)
Heater Delay =____________________

1 3600 seconds
(Visible if Type = Heater)
Output 2

Type
Speed, None
Mode =____________________
Level or Pulse

SETTINGS
Hold Time =____________________

0.1 1000 seconds
Follow Delay =____________________

0.1 1000 seconds
Heater Delay =____________________

1 3600 seconds
Output 3

Type
Speed, None
Mode =____________________
Level or Pulse
Hold Time =____________________

0.1 1000 seconds
Follow Delay =____________________

0.1 1000 seconds
Heater Delay =____________________

1 3600 seconds
Output 4

Type
Speed, None
Mode =____________________
Level or Pulse
Hold Time =____________________

0.1 1000 seconds
Follow Delay =____________________

0.1 1000 seconds
Heater Delay =____________________

1 3600 seconds

SETTINGS
Expansion IO Module 1
Module Type 8DI or 4DI+2DO or None =____________________
8DI Module1 or 4DI+2DO Module1 =____________________

Module ID
or None
Input 1-1
(Hidden if Module Type = None)

Inputs, None
Mode
Start3 or Start4)
Validation Period
Contactor Time




Input 1-2

Inputs, None
Mode
Start3 or Start4)
Validation Period

SETTINGS
Contactor Time
Interlock Config Disable, Alarm, Trip, Interlock1 to


0.1 10 seconds
Reset Modes =____________________


Enable or Disable
Input 1-3

Inputs, None
Mode
Start3 or Start4)
Validation Period
Contactor Time


0.1 10 seconds
Reset Modes =____________________


Enable or Disable

SETTINGS
Input 1-4

Inputs, None
Mode
Start3 or Start4)
Validation Period
Contactor Time

Interlock Config



Input 1-5
(Visible if Module Type = 8DI)

Inputs, None
Mode
Start3 or Start4)
Validation Period
Contactor Time

SETTINGS




Input 1-6

Inputs, None
Mode
Start3 or Start4)
Validation Period
Contactor Time

Interlock Config



Input 1-7

Inputs, None

SETTINGS
Mode
Start3 or Start4)
Validation Period
Contactor Time

Interlock Config



Input 1-8

Inputs, None
Mode
Start3 or Start4)
Validation Period
Contactor Time


Reset Modes =____________________


SETTINGS

Output 1-1
(Visible if Module Type = 4DI+2DO)

Type
Speed, None
Mode =____________________
Level or Pulse
Hold Time =____________________

0.1 1000 seconds
Follow Delay =____________________

0.1 1000 seconds
Heater Delay =____________________

1 3600 seconds
Output 1-2

to Truth Table o/p 16, Timer 1 o/p,
Type =____________________
Speed, None
Mode =____________________
Level or Pulse
Hold Time =____________________

0.1 1000 seconds
Follow Delay =____________________

0.1 1000 seconds
Heater Delay =____________________

1 3600 seconds

SETTINGS
Contactor Time




Module ID 8DI Module1 or 4DI+2DO Module1 =____________________

or None
Input 2-1

Inputs, None
Mode
Start3 or Start4)
Validation Period
Contactor Time

Interlock Config



Enable or Disable

SETTINGS
Input 2-2

Inputs, None
Mode
Start3 or Start4)
Validation Period
Contactor Time

Interlock Config



Input 2-3

Type Stop, Estop, Local/Remote, Interlock1
to Interlock12, Contactor Feedback1, =____________________
Inputs, None
Mode
Start3 or Start4)
Validation Period
Contactor Time

SETTINGS




Input 2-4

Inputs, None
Mode
Start3 or Start4)
Validation Period
Contactor Time

Interlock Config

0.1 10 seconds
Reset Modes =____________________


Enable or Disable
Input 2-5

Inputs, None

SETTINGS
Mode
Start3 or Start4)
Validation Period
Contactor Time

Interlock Config



Input 2-6

Inputs, None
Mode
Start3 or Start4)
Validation Period
Contactor Time


Reset Modes =____________________


SETTINGS

Input 2-7

Inputs, None
Mode
Start3 or Start4)
Validation Period
Contactor Time

Interlock Config



Input 2-8

Inputs, None
Mode
Start3 or Start4)
Validation Period

SETTINGS
Contactor Time
(Visible if Contactor Feedback1 or =____________________
0.1 60 seconds




Output 2-1

Type
Speed, None
Mode =____________________
Level or Pulse
Hold Time =____________________

0.1 1000 seconds
Follow Delay =____________________

0.1 1000 seconds
Heater Delay =____________________

1 3600 seconds
Output 2-2

Type
Speed, None

SETTINGS
Mode =____________________
Level or Pulse
Hold Time =____________________

0.1 1000 seconds
Follow Delay =____________________

0.1 1000 seconds
Heater Delay =____________________

1 3600 seconds
8DI Module1 or 4DI+2DO Module1 =____________________

Module ID
or None
Input 3-1

Inputs, None
Mode
Start3 or Start4)
Validation Period
Contactor Time


0.1 10 seconds
Reset Modes =____________________


Enable or Disable

SETTINGS
Input 3-2

Inputs, None
Mode
Start3 or Start4)
Validation Period
Contactor Time

Interlock Config



Input 3-3

Inputs, None
Mode
Start3 or Start4)
Validation Period
Contactor Time

SETTINGS

Interlock Config



Input 3-4

Inputs, None
Mode
Start3 or Start4)
Validation Period
Contactor Time




Input 3-5

Inputs, None

SETTINGS
Mode
Start3 or Start4)
Validation Period
Contactor Time

Interlock Config



Input 3-6

Inputs, None
Mode
Start3 or Start4)
Validation Period
Contactor Time

Interlock Config

Reset Modes =____________________


SETTINGS

Input 3-7

Inputs, None
Mode
Start3 or Start4)
Validation Period
Contactor Time

Interlock Config



Input 3-8

Inputs, None
Mode
Start3 or Start4)
Validation Period

SETTINGS
Contactor Time

Interlock Config



Output 3-1

Type
Speed, None
Mode =____________________
Level or Pulse
Hold Time =____________________

0.1 1000 seconds
Follow Delay =____________________

0.1 1000 seconds
Heater Delay =____________________

1 3600 seconds
Output 3-2

to Truth Table o/p 16, Timer 1 o/p,
Type =____________________
Speed, None

SETTINGS
Mode =____________________
Level or Pulse
Hold Time =____________________

0.1 1000 seconds
Follow Delay =____________________

0.1 1000 seconds
Heater Delay =____________________

1 3600 seconds
Parameter Mapping Settings
Parameter mapping
(Hidden if Protocol Selection = Profibus in communication settings)
16 words (in case of Modbus serial)

User configurable as per requirement =____________________
32 words (in case of Modbus TCP/IP)
Table 8-20: Parameter mapping settings
COMPlogic Settings
Truth Tables
2I/1O Truth Table 1
Gate Operation AND, OR, XOR, NOR, NAND, CUSTOM =____________________
2I/1O Truth Table 2
3I/1O Truth Table 3
3I/1O Truth Table 4
Table 8-21 (1): COMPlogic settings

SETTINGS
3I/1O Truth Table 5
3I/1O Truth Table 6
3I/1O Truth Table 7
3I/1O Truth Table 8
3I/1O Truth Table 9
3I/1O Truth Table 10

SETTINGS

SETTINGS
Signal Conditioners
Type Inverting, Non Inverting, Positive Edge =____________________

Latch, Negative Edge Latch
Input Freely Programmable =____________________
Reset Freely Programmable =____________________
Type Inverting, Non Inverting, Positive Edge =____________________

Latch, Negative Edge Latch =____________________
Counters
Counter 1
Limit 1 65535 count =____________________
Input Up Freely Programmable =____________________
Input Down Freely Programmable =____________________
Counter 2
Limit 1 65535 count =____________________
Input Up Freely Programmable =____________________
Input Down Freely Programmable =____________________
Timers
Timer 1
Limit 0 65535 seconds =____________________
Level Triggered ON timer, Rising Edge

Type ON timer, Falling Edge OFF timer, =____________________
Rising Edge OFF timer
Timer 2
Limit 0 65535 seconds =____________________
Level Triggered ON timer, Rising Edge

Type ON timer, Falling Edge OFF timer, =____________________
Rising Edge OFF timer

USER INTERFACE

USER INTERAFCE
Overview The MCOMP Suite can run in MCOMP of ine mode as well. In this
case, settings may be saved for future use. If the Relay is
This section provides a detailed description of local interfacing
connected to a computer and communications are enabled, the
methods available with the Relay. There are two local modes
Relay can be programmed from the setting screens.
available for a user to interface with the Relay.
MCOMP Suite Interface.
Software Pre-requisites:
Display Interface.
Operating System supported is Microsoft Windows XP, Vista
and Windows 7.
MCOMP Suite Interface
Microsoft .NET Framework 3.5 or higher
MCOMP Suite is software available with the Relay through which
MCOMP Suite: (in MCOMP Suite folder).
a user can monitor, control or con gure the Relay, also serves as a
strong diagnostic tool for troubleshooting purpose. A PC is
required to host this software through which it can communicate Hardware Pre-requisites:
with the Relay. The MCOMP Suite can be used only after the
installation of .NET Framework 3.5 Service Pack 1 or higher. Minimum memory space required on root drive of hard disk is
1GB.
With MCOMP Suite, it is possible to:
Pentium 4 computer with 2GHz speed and 512MB RAM.
monitor and meter the data: Various metering parameters
such as 3-Phase Voltage, 3-Phase Current, Frequency, Phase RS485 Converter.
Sequence and parameters related to Power and Energy can be
monitored. The status of Digital inputs and outputs can also be
Installation Guide
monitored.
.NET Framework 3.5 Service Pack installation
program and modify the settings: The software allows a
user to set the values as per requirement. After ensuring the minimum requirements indicated earlier, use
the following procedure to install the .NET Framework 3.5 Service
read actual values: A user can get the actual motor running
Pack 1 (If it is not installed, install the framework from the folder
values.
'Framework3.5SP1').
read motor status: A user can check the status of motor -
1. Double click on FrmWrk3.5sp1, to get the setup le
run, stop or trip condition.
Dotnetfx35sp1.exe.Double click on Dotnetfx35sp1.exe to install
read pre-trip & trip cause data and number of event .NET Framework 3.5 Service Pack 1.
records: A user can get the recent 5 trip records and causes for
the trips.
Screenshot - 1

USER INTERAFCE
2. Read and accept the terms of the license agreement and click 4. When the installation is completed, Windows gives a message
on Install button. .NET Framework 3.5 Sp1 has been installed successfully.
Screenshot - 2 Screenshot - 4
3. After accepting the license agreement, Windows will start

installing the setup. Status bar shows the progress.
Screenshot - 3

USER INTERAFCE
Multi-version MCOMP Suite Installation

MCOMP Suite installation can be carried out by using Multi-
version MCOMP Suite.
1. Double click on the setup.exe of Multi-version MCOMP Suite.
Screenshot - 1
2. Multi-version MCOMP Suite setup wizard guides the user 3. Select the installation path by pressing Browse button. Press
through the steps required to install Multi-version MCOMP Suite Next button to continue with the setup. (Multi-version MCOMP
on computer. Press Next button to continue. Suite can install for all users who uses this computer or for self
depending on access).

USER INTERAFCE
4. Con rm installation: The installer is ready to install the Multi- 5. After successful installation press Close button to nish the
version MCOMP Suite on your computer. Click on Next to start setup.
the installation.
MCOMP Suite Installation 2. Double click on the above icon to install MCOMP Suite from
MCOMP Suite multiversion setup in two ways Manual Selection
Using Multi-version MCOMP Suite user can install MCOMP Suite.
and Auto Selection:
1. Double click on Multi-version MCOMP Suite icon
In case of Manual Selection: Select the MCOMP Firmware Version
and click on Install MCOMP Suite option.
In case of Auto Selection user can select the MCOMP version
directly by reading MCOMP rmware version from the Relay and
Click on Install MCOMP Suite option.

USER INTERAFCE
3. Click on Next to start installation. Operation Guide
MCOMP Suite Con guration
Con gure the MCOMP Suite to work with the Relay using
following steps:
Double click on the MCOMP Suite short cut icon, the next
window will prompt for user ID and password. A three level of
access is provided to a particular user depending on the read-
write permission. Enter the user id and password.
4. After the installation gets completed, an icon as shown below

will be created as a shortcut on the desktop of the computer.
Table 9 1: MCOMP Suite Access shows the available access to

login MCOMP Suite.
Access
Sr. No. Login Type Function
Read Write
1 Admin √ √ Provided with additional privileges and system data access
2 Supervisor √ √ No administrative privileges on system data access. User can only change/modify the Relay settings.
3 User √ √ Read only mode. User can not change/modify the Relay settings.
Table 9-1: MCOMP Suite Access

USER INTERAFCE
After entering the user ID and password, the main
(Monitoring) window will appear.
Monitoring Mode
Options
Click on the Options tab to con gure the communication To connect the MCOMP Suite through the Display, select the
settings required for the MCOMP Suite. User can select the check box Connect through Display. The user can also select a
appropriate COM port, to which the Relay is connected. Other theme from the drop down box as per the requirement.
parameters such as Device ID, Baud Rate, Parity and Stop Bits will
remain same.

USER INTERAFCE
Change Password Switch To Con guration Mode
Click on Change Password tab to change the existing password. Click on Switch To Con guration Mode tab to view the
In this case user has to enter old password and then set a new following window.
password. The MCOMP Suite will validate the old password and
stores the new password.

USER INTERAFCE
About
Zoom Out
Click on About tab to view the version of the MCOMP Suite.
Click on Zoom Out tab to zoom out the size.
Short cuts: [CTRL + -] or use [CTRL + Scroll Mouse Down].
Zoom to Fit
Click on Zoom to Fit to zoom to normal size.

Short cuts: [CTRL + *] or use [CTRL + Scroll Mouse Button].
Con g Report
Click on Con g Report tab to generate a report. A printable

report will be saved in an XML format as shown below:
Zoom In
Click on Zoom In tab to zoom in.

Short cuts: [CTRL + +] or use [CTRL + Scroll Mouse Up].

USER INTERAFCE
The path for the generated report is as shown below:
C:\Program Files\M COMP Suite\M COMP Suit v4.4.1\SETTINGS_20102522_172420.xml
New User Supervisor
Click on New User tab to create a new login account. Click on Supervisor tab to view list of supervisors. This option
allow administrator to block or unblock a supervisor.
User
Click on User tab to view list of users. This option allows

Administrator/Supervisor to block or unblock a user.
Start Monitoring
Click on Start Monitoring tab to monitor various measurable
parameters. If the Relay is connected to PC and the
communication is working without any error, then MCOMP Suite
will display a system message: MCOMP Online!!!

USER INTERAFCE
Record Viewer - The window shows the trip cause, date and time of occurrence
and pre-trip values.
Record Viewer is used to view the trip/event records and starting
curve of the motor. The Relay can store last ve trip and event - Click Refresh to retrieve the last stored trip records.
records.
- Click Report to generate a report of trip records with date and
time.
- It also maintains the trip counter that counts the number of
trips occurred.
The Trip indicator in the MCOMP Suite glows red when the
Relay senses trip condition. Click on Trip tab to view trip Note: On occurrence of an error, the MCOMP Suite will display an error
records. The trip record window shows the details of the last message Error in reading the data from MCOMP. Retry again. Check the
ve trips along with causes in FIFO (First In First Out) sequence: connection between MCOMP Suite and the Relay for resolving an error.
Trip Records

USER INTERAFCE
The Alarm/Pick-up indicator in the MCOMP Suite glows red - This window shows the alarm/pickup source, date and time of
when the Relay senses alarm/pick-up condition. Click on occurrence.
Alarm/Pick-Up tab to view event records. The event record
- Click Refresh to retrieve the last stored event records.
window gives the details of last ve events along with event
source in FIFO (First In First Out) sequence. - Click Report to generate a report of event records with date
and time.
Event Records
Click on Start Curve tab to view the last starting curve stored
by the Relay. Press Plot Graph to plot the graph of starting
current Vs time. The curve stored can also be compared with
the present curve using the Compare Graph option.
- This window shows the alarm/pickup source, date and time of
occurrence.
- Click Refresh to retrieve the last stored event records.
- Click Report to generate a report of event records with date
and time.

USER INTERAFCE
Control Memory Dump
Motor Start 1: to start the motor in forward direction. Memory Dump option is an administrative command used to
create for different system les of the Relay. Click on Start Dump
Motor Start 2: to start the motor in reverse direction.
option to dump the default settings into the Relay and the status
Trip Reset: to reset the trip condition of the Relay. bar will show the progress. After completion of memory dump,
the MCOMP Suite will give a message as Memory Dump
completed. Then close the pop-up window using Close option.
Note: Control option can be used only when the MCOMP Suite is online. Note: On occurrence of any error if the MCOMP is not connected, then
MCOMP Suite will show an error message Error in writing . Check the
connection between MCOMP Suite and the Relay for resolving an error.
Special Commands
The user can send individual commands to the Relay using Special
Command option. Special Command is used to check the Relay
status and also can used for diagnostic and troubleshooting
purpose.
Click on Special Command tab to enter the command terminal.
The status bar shows the status of the sent command and action
taken.
Caution: Memory Dump command is not recommended during

normal operation; should be strictly used only under guidance of
the manufacturer.

USER INTERAFCE
Con guration Mode

Click on Switch to Con guration Mode tab to enter into
con guration mode, the following window appears:
Note: The user can shift to con guration mode if the Relay is of ine. In con guration mode the user can set the
following parameters:
System settings
Protection settings
Communication settings
IO settings
Parameter settings

USER INTERAFCE
Different le operations can be carried out using following: 4. After completion, the MCOMP will give a message as, All Files
read Successfully!!!.
Read Selected
This option is used to read selected con guration les from the
Relay.
1. Click on Read Selected tab to read only the selected 5. If MCOMP Suite is unable to read the le from MCOMP, it will
con guration parameters. The MCOMP Suite will prompt the user give an error message as Read failed
to save the con guration or not. Select Yes to save the
con guration else select No.
Write Selected
2. Enter a name to save the con guration le in the below
window.
This option is used to write selected con guration les into the
Relay.
1. Click on Write Selected tab, MCOMP Suite will prompt a

warning message as Online con guration of MCOMP Relay
(when motor is running) is not recommended . Select OK to
proceed or cancel to abort the write operation.
3. After saving the con guration, the MCOMP Suite prompts the
user to read the le. Select Yes option in the pop-up window to 2. MCOMP Suite will prompt to con rm if the con guration
read the le. needs to be saved. Select YES to save the con guration in case
user wants to save the le.

USER INTERAFCE
3. Enter a name to save the con guration le and click Save.
Write All
This option can be used to write all the con guration les into the
Relay. Operation philosophy is the same as of Write Selected le
menu. After write completion, the MCOMP will give a message
as, All Setting Files written Successful!!!.
4. After saving the con guration, MCOMP Suite will prompt for
con rmation to write the le. Select Yes to write the
con guration else select NO.
Note: It is strictly recommended to perform read all operation before writing any
settings into the MCOMP relay.
New File
5. After completion, the MCOMP will give a message as, File
Write Successful!!
New File is used to save all the parameters into a new

con guration le.
Save File
6. If MCOMP Suite is unable to write the le to MCOMP, it will

Save File is used to save the le into the current con guration le
give an error message as Failed to write le .
(if the le exists).
Read All
Open File
Open File is used to open and load the le from existing

This option can be used to read all the con guration les from the con guration le into M COMP Suite.
Relay. Operation philosophy is the same as of Read Selected le
menu. After read completion, the MCOMP will give a message as,
All Files read Successfully!!!.

USER INTERAFCE
Con guring System Settings Click on System Settings tab to view the available setting using
MCOMP Suite:
System settings determine the starting method and general
motor characteristics. The following settings are available under
system settings:
To navigate to the motor Settings, follow the path shown

below:
System Motor Set value for particular Write All/ Write

Settings Settings parameter Selected
The motor setting window displays all the available parameter

settings. Some of them are shown below:

USER INTERAFCE
To navigate to the Starter Settings, follow the path shown
below:
System Starter Set Type, mode of Write All/ Write

Settings Settings parameter Selected
The starter setting window displays all the available parameter

settings:
Note: Follow the same procedure for other system settings.
Con guring Protection Settings

Protection Settings allow the user to set different alarm/pick-up
values and con guration time delays for each protection provided
in the Relay.
Click on Protection Setting tab to view the following window:

USER INTERAFCE
To navigate to the Earth Fault Settings, follow the path
shown below:
Protection Earth Set pick-up, alarm/trip, Write All / Write

Settings Fault delay as required Selected
The earth fault window displays all the available parameter

settings.
Note: Follow the same procedure for other system settings.
Con guring Communication Settings be displayed according to its hardware.

Communication Settings allow the user to set the parameters for Click on Communication Settings tab to view the following
Modbus RTU, Modbus TCP/IP and Pro bus Communication window:
protocol. The communication settings available in the Relay will
Note: Protocol selection is possible only in Admin mode.
Modbus Settings:
To navigate to the Modbus Settings, follow the path shown
below:
Communication Modbus/Pro bus/ Set required Write All / Write

Settings Ethernet selection values Selected

USER INTERAFCE
The Modbus setting window displays all the available settings.
Pro bus DP Settings:

To navigate to the Pro bus Settings, follow the path shown
below:
Communication Modbus/Pro bus/ Set required Write All / Write

Settings Ethernet selection node address Selected
The pro bus setting window displays all the available settings.
Modbus TCP/IP Settings:

To navigate to the Pro bus Settings, follow the path shown below:
Communication Modbus/Pro bus/ Set required

Write All / Write
Settings Ethernet selection values Selected
The Modbus TCP/IP setting window displays all the available

settings.
Note: In case of Time synchronization using SNTP, enter correct SNTP

address and time zone.

USER INTERAFCE
Con guring IO Settings
IO settings allow the user to con gure the basic, expansion digital
Inputs/ digital outputs and analog outputs as applicable.
Click on IO Settings tab to view following window:
Click on IO Settings option to view all available DIOs and Analog

output available in the basic Relay.

USER INTERAFCE
To navigate to the Digital Input Settings, follow the path
shown below:
IO Select Digital Set required Write All / Write

Settings Input as required parameters Selected
The Digital Input window displays all the available settings.
If selected input is interlock, select interlock con guration as

shown in the following screen.
Note : Follow the same procedure for other Digital Inputs.

User can not assign one Type to two digital inputs.
To navigate to the Digital Output Settings, follow the path

shown below:
IO Select Digital Set required Write All / Write

Settings Output as required parameters Selected

USER INTERAFCE
The Digital Output window displays all the available settings.
Note: Follow the same procedure for other Digital Outputs.

If the output is selected as HEATER, select the heater delay time in
seconds.
To navigate to the Analog Output Settings, follow the path

shown below:
IO Select Analog Set required Write All / Write

Settings Output parameters Selected
The Analog Output window displays all the available settings
To navigate to the External IO Settings, follow the path shown below:
IO Select required Set required Write All / Write

Settings external IO module parameters Selected
Click on External DIO Module number and ID option and select

Module Type. Below screen shows all available settings.
Note: Follow the same procedure for other expansion IO modules.

USER INTERAFCE
Con guring Parameter Mapping
Parameter Mapping allows the user to select parameters and
store them in a contiguous Fast scan Register. In case of Modbus
RTU, the fast scan register stores up to 16 words and for Modbus
TCP/IP up to 32 words.
To navigate to the Parameter Mapping Settings, follow the
path shown below:
Parameter Select Add/remove Write All / Write

Mapping parameter parameter Selected
Note: Memory Map Option is used only when communication protocol

select is as Modbus RTU or Modbus TCP/IP.
Click on Parameter Mapping tab to view all available parameter

mapping option.

USER INTERAFCE
Con guring COMPlogic
Click on COMPlogic tab to view all available COMPlogic
modules.
To navigate to the 3I/1O Truth Table, follow the path shown

below:
COMPlogic 3I/1O Select I/P Select Write All / Write

Settings truth table parameter Gates Selected
Note: Follow the same procedure for all COMPlogic modules.
Click on 3I/1O Truth Table tab to view all available setting options.

USER INTERAFCE
Display Interface
The Display is used an operator interface to view/edit the Relay
settings and can also be used for metering, monitoring and
control of the Relay. The Display acts as a mediator between the
Relay and the MCOMP Suite on PC with the help of USB cable.
Figure 9-1 : Display shows the Display and Table 9 2 shows the
Display element description. For Display overview and connection
details refer Installation chapter.
Figure 9-1: Display
Label Element Function
1 Communication/ Power LED Green when the Display is powered ON and red when it is fetching/processing data
from/to the Relay.
2 Drive Status LED Same as Drive Status LED of the Relay.
3 Alarm/Pickup LED Same as Alarm/Pickup LED of the Relay.
4 Trip LED Same as Trip LED of the Relay.
5 Reset Key Resets the Trip status of the Relay.
6 Return Key Move into the previous level within a menu or a function.
7 Enter Key Move into the next level within a menu or a function.
8 USB front port Connect to a PC for configuring the Relay through the MCOMP Suite.
9 Navigation Keys Move the menu, Setting value increase/decrease.
10 OLED Display OLED Display for monitoring the readings, viewing settings and records.
Table 9-2: Display Element Description
Operation Guide healthy between the Display and the Relay then following screen
will appear. It is the default screen of the Display.
Power on the Display as discussed in Installation chapter.
Ir : 0.0A
After Power On, the following screen appears with PWR/COMM
LED showing green color. Iy : 0.0A
Ib : 0.0A
Iavg : 0.0A
Note: The values of measurement shown in the above screen are for
representational purpose only. The Display will show the actual values
Ver X.XX measured by the Relay.
When the Display is not connected to the Relay then it will

continue to show the above screen. When communication is

USER INTERAFCE
Press ENT key to get Menu screen shown below. It has six icons. Metering
User can navigate to the desired icon by using UP/DOWN keys.
To view metering parameters, select METERING icon from the
Metering icon screen using the navigation arrow keys.
Metering
Icon Description
Metering: View all metering Press ENT key to view Metering parameters. Press UP/DOWN
parameters. navigation key for viewing various metering parameters.
Settings: View / Edit all setting
parameters. Metering
View Record: View details of trip
and event records. Ir : 0.0A
Commands: Issue commands to
the Relay. Iy : 0.0A
Display: Change Display related Ib : 0.0A
settings like contrast, language etc,.
Connect To PC: The Display enters
in the PC connection mode where
user can configure the Relay with
the MCOMP Suite through the
Display.
Table 9-3: Display icon description
Table 9 4 lists all parameters notation displayed in metering screen:
Parameter Notation on the Display

Line current values Ir, Iy, Ib
Earth fault current Io
Percentage Current-Unbalance % IUB
Average current value Iavg
Line, Phase voltage values Vry, Vyb, Vbr, Vr, Vy, Vb
Average voltage value Vavg
Frequency Freq
All types of total power consumption kW, KVAr, KVA
Active Energy KWh
Power Factor PF
CM Type CM Type
Thermal Capacity Level TherC
PTC Resistance PTC Res
Phase sequence PhSeq
Motor starting time Tstart
Temperature Temp
No of stops No Stps
Motor run hrs Hr Run
Total Motor Run hrs T Hr Run
Starting Peak Current StrPkI
Digital Input/Output Status Digital I/O
Table 9-4 : Display metering Notations

USER INTERAFCE
Settings System Settings

To view/edit settings of the Relay, select Settings icon in the menu Select System from the Settings menu and press ENT key to enter
screen. in to system settings.
Settings Settings
Full load Current
Motor Voltage
Auxiliary Supply
The Display settings can be viewed in edit able mode or non-edit

able mode. If the user presses ENT key on menu screen after
To set the each system setting parameter, follow the procedure
selecting Settings icon, the Display will prompt to select the
given in Relay Con guration through the Display.
mode. The Display shows two options as follows:
Settings Protection Settings
Edit Select Protection from the Settings menu and press ENT key.
View Settings
System
In Edit mode, user can edit or change the setting parameters and
Protection
apply the same in the Relay. In View mode, user can only view the
setting parameters currently stored in the Relay. Digital I/O
On the selection of Edit mode, the Display will prompt for a four
digit password for authenticity. Valid password range is from
0000 to 9999. The list of Protections will be displayed. Use UP/DOWN arrow
keys to navigate to all other Protections.
PASSWORD Select the required parameter by pressing UP/DOWN key and

press ENT key to change the settings.
X X X X
Protection
To enter password, use UP/DOWN arrow to select the digit. Press Overload
ENT key to save the current digit and to move to the next digit. Locked Rotor
Repeat the same procedure for other digits.
Phase Reversal
Once the correct password is entered, Settings screen will be
displayed as shown below:
Press ENT key to enter the Overload Settings.

Settings
System Overload
Protection Iset : 100.0% I c
Digital I/O Al Set : 95.0% Tm
ThMem : Enable
The Settings screen consists of four con guration les, which can
be viewed and/or edited.
To set the each protection parameter, follow the procedure given
1. System in Relay Con guration through the Display.
2. Protection
3. Digital I/O
4. Communication

USER INTERAFCE
Digital I/O Settings Note: Type eld is not editable through the Display and it is xed as per
Select Digital I/O from the settings menu and press ENT key. hardware con guration.
Settings
To set communication parameters, follow the procedure given in
System Relay Con guration through the Display.
Protection
View Records
Digital I/O
To view trip/event records of the Relay, select View Records icon
Press ENT key to con gure respective Digital I/O and analog by navigating in the main menu screen using up/down arrows.
output.
VIEW RECORDS
Digital I/O
Digital I/P1
Digital I/P2
Digital I/P3
Press ENT key to enter into records screen. User can view two
Select the required input by pressing UP/DOWN key and press types of records:
ENT key to con gure the settings.
View Records
Digital I/P 1
Trip
Type : None
Event
T Valid : 0.10 Sec
Trip records
To set any digital input/output and analog output, follow the
At any given time, maximum ve Trip records can be stored in First
procedure given in Relay Con guration through the Display.
In First Out (FIFO) sequence. Press ENT key to view trip records.
Trip
Communication Settings
Trip Counter
Select Communication from the settings menu and press ENT
key. Trip Record 1
Settings Trip Record 2
Protection
Following parameters are available in Trip records:
Digital I/O Trip cause
Communication Date
Time
Press ENT key to con gure respective communication protocol
depending on the Relay hardware con guration. Currents (Ir, Iy, IB, Ie)
Voltages (Vr, Vy, Vb)
Modbus communication settings: Frequency

Temperature
Communication
PTC resistance
Type : Modbus
Mode : RTU
Use UP/DOWN arrow keys to navigate to the Trip Record 1.
Node :1 Press ENT key to see trip records. Press UP/DOWN key to see all
trip record parameters.

USER INTERAFCE
of the Display. Select COMMANDS icon to from main Menu
Trip Record 1
screen and press ENT key to enter in to command menu.
11/11/2010
COMMANDS
11:55:10:600
Ir : 10.0A
Note: Follow the same procedure for other Trip records.

Note that Trip records will only be displayed if Trip counter is not zero. After pressing ENT key, the Display will prompt for password.
If Trip record value is say one, then only one record will be displayed on Enter the valid password to access various commands. For
screen and maximum of ve records can be viewed from the Display procedure to enter password refer Relay Con guration through
even Trip counter value greater than ve. the Display in Settings chapter.
Press ENT key to view Commands. Press UP/DOWN keys for
other commands.
Event Records
Commands
At any given time, maximum ve Event records can be stored in
First In First Out (FIFO) sequence. Press ENT key to view event Motor Start 2
records.
Motor Stop
Event
MCOMP Reset
Event Counter
Select the command to be given to the Relay and press ENT key to
Event Counter 1
send command to the Relay. A message saying CMD SENT will be
Event Counter 2 displayed on successful operation.
Commands
Following parameters are available in Event records: Motor Start 2

CMD Sent
Event source (alarm or pickup) Motor Stop
Date MCOMP Reset
Time
Event cause
Display Settings
Use UP/DOWN arrow keys to navigate to the Event Record 1.
Press ENT key to see trip records. Press UP/DOWN key to see all Select the Display icon on the main menu screen to change the
event record parameters. Display settings and press ENT key to enter into Display menu.
DISPLAY
Event Record 1
Fault : PickUp
11/11/2010
11:55:10:600
Press ENT key to edit the Display parameters.

Follow the same procedure for other Event records.
Display
Note that Trip records will only be displayed if event counter is not
zero. If event record value is say one, then only one record will be Language
displayed on screen and maximum of ve records can be viewed from
Logo Display
the Display even event counter value greater than ve.
Contrast Value
Commands
Commands can be sent to the Relay from the Commands menu

USER INTERAFCE
The Display setting consists of ve parameters, which can be Press ENT key to select YES and to enter into PC mode. The
viewed and/or edited: following screen will appear once the Display is connected to
computer.
Language
Logo display Con g Mode
Contrast value
Power save
Rolling display
Press return key to end this mode, the Display will prompt for
Connect to PC
con rmation as follows:
In this mode, the Relay can be connected to the MCOMP Suite
through USB port of the Display. Disconnect ?
To enter in this mode, connect USB cable from front port available YES
on the Display to computer's USB port.
NO
Select the CONNECT TO PC icon on the main menu screen and
press ENT key to enter in to Connect to PC menu.
CONNECT TO PC
Select YES to end the PC mode.
Press ENT key, the Display will prompt for con rmation as shown
below.
CONNECT TO PC ?
YES
NO

TESTING AND
TROUBLESHOOTING

TESTING & TROUBLESHOOTING
Overview For balanced system, set the equal magnitude of all the 3 phases
(current and voltage) with balanced angles in the test kit & apply
This section allows the user to acknowledge and troubleshoot any
to the relay making balanced system. The applied values should
problems encountered during testing and commissioning of the
be greater than 10% of the set IFLC and VN values. Observe the
Relay.
current and voltage magnitude & compare with the expected
A complete functional check and calibration has been performed metering by taking CT/PT ratio into consideration (if enabled).
for each unit before it is shipped to ensure that the relay is fully Earth fault current, Current Unbalance in metering should be
functional. For testing and troubleshooting the relay at site, the zero.
reference data provided herein helps the user to check if the relay
For unbalance system, set the different magnitude & angles for
is functioning as per the desired speci cation and is properly
the all the 3 phases (current and voltage) in the test kit & apply to
connected in the motor feeder for the control inputs and outputs.
the relay making the system unbalanced. Observe the current and
voltage magnitude of all phases and compare with the expected
Testing metering by taking CT/PT ratio into consideration (if enabled).
The procedure described in this section helps the user to enter

settings into the relay, verify the relay connection and tests the Power, Energy & Power factor:
functional behavior of the relay. It is not necessary to test every
a. Connect both current as well as voltage source to the relay.
function of the relay to verify the relay s behavior. Brief functional
tests ensure that the relay is operational as per the settings done b. Set the magnitude of the voltage and current as per the
in the relay. requirement of the system.
c. Observe the Active, Reactive and Apparent Power/Energy
metering values with the expected values by taking CT & PT
Connection Setup Requirement
ratio into consideration.
Apart from the relay main unit, CM unit and connecting cables,
d. Observe Power factor & compare with the expected result.
the 3 phase power source like Omicron, Freza, Doble is required
to test the relay.
Protection Testing
Metering testing The protection testing of the relay can be performed on the same
setup used for metering testing. The basic protection elements
Phase current and voltage:
needs to be enabled and set as per the requirement and after
Connect the MCOMP CM unit with the base unit with the pre- injecting the proper values, the protection tripping can be
fabricated CM cable provided with the current module unit. Pass checked. The drive status should be as running status for the relay
R-Y-B phase current cables of current source i.e. testing kit to give the protection trip command after detecting the fault.
through the R-Y-B pass through holes of MCOMP current module Below example shows the protection testing in case of thermal
opening and short them with neutral of the test kit. Wire 3 phase overload.
voltages with neutral to the voltage terminal present on the
MCOMP base unit (assuming it is 3P-4W system).
Settings Applied Input Expected Result Observed Result
IFLC = 1A ( set as per CM type) Inject the current Trip in 10.4 sec
ISET = 100% IFLC IR, IY, IB = 6 A
Trip class = 10
IFLC = 1A ( set as per CM type) Inject the current Trip in 42.6 sec
ISET = 100% IFLC IR, IY, IB = 3 A
Trip class = 10
Table 10-1: Thermal Overload Protection testing

Table 10-1: Thermal Overload Protection testing
Problem Possible Causes Diagnosis
If any DI configured as STOP

is low.
If any DI configured as
INTERLOCK STOP is low.
Check Inhibit Status through Special commands in MCOMP
Thermal Capacity is beyond Suite or Commands in the Display menu.
Motor not the set threshold limit.
starting due to Make the system healthy by removing the Inhibit condition(s).
Inhibit condition. Unhealthy 3-phase voltage The relay will not allow to start the motor if inhibit condition
(if Voltage Connection is enabled). is present. If the motor has been started externally, the relay
will not protect the motor as it is in inhibit condition.
Motor is in trip condition.
Maximum number of starts

exceeds the set permissive limit
within the set reference period.
Check Modes of Starting Matrix in Starter Settings using the

Motor is in MCOMP Suite or the Display.
The Start Matrix is configured
healthy condition improperly in Starter Settings.
(No Inhibit) but Check DO configuration in IO Settings as per Starter Settings.
not starting. For DOL - ensure RUN output selection.
Improper DO configuration.
For RDOL - ensure FORWARD RELAY and REVERSE RELAY selection.
For STAR-DELTA - ensure STAR, DELTA and MAIN selection.
STOP is low. Check the cause for the motor stop through special commands
in the MCOMP Suite or commands in the Display menu.
CONTACTOR FEEDBACK is low. Check physical wiring.
If any DI configured as Ensure that the contactor is picking up.
Motor is stopping. MAINTAINED START is low.
Set sufficient validation time for the DI in IO settings.
INTERLOCK STOP is low.
If Current Auto Stop is enabled

and all 3-phase currents are less
than 10%.
Full load current setting is not Ensure if proper CM type is connected and verify if the CM
as per the range of the Relay type is displayed in Monitoring mode of the MCOMP Suite or
CM type. Metering menu in the Display. Set proper Full load current (IFLC)
The Relay does and rated voltage in system settings as per the motor rating.
not measure/ 3-phase system selection is
display accurate improper. Check for 3-phase 3-wire or 3- phase 4-wire system selection in
values of voltages system settings.
and currents. Wiring error.
Check wiring and connection as per the drawing schematics.
Incompatibility between the Relay
and Display firmware. Consult the Relay manufacturer.
Table 10-2 (1): Troubleshooting conditions

Problem Possible Causes Diagnosis
Ensure the alarm and trip selection is done in the Protection

Improper test source settings.
Settings for the required fault.
(in case of manual testing of
The Relay is not the Relay)
responding to a Ensure proper settings in the test source. Also, verify if current
fault. injection is as per the CM range.
Improper wiring.
Check the wiring and connections.
Ensure if new settings are saved.

The Relay is not
behaving as per New settings are not saved. If settings are done through the Display or through the
new settings. MCOMP Suite (in supervisor or user mode), ensure that the
Relay is power recycled after saving the settings.
Table 10-2 (2): Troubleshooting conditions
Special Commands
Table 10 3 shows a list of Special Commands.
Sr No. Commands Description
1 Plug in check Shows whether the Relay is connected to the MCOMP Suite or not.
2 MCOMP Status Shows the status for running motor, trip, inhibit, etc,.
3 Status of EEPROM read Shows the status of EEPROM for read operation.
4 Status of EEPROM Write Shows the status of EEPROM for write operation.
5 Status of the MCOMP file system Shows the status of setting files and internal file systems.
6 Capture starting curve Used to store the last starting curve, so as to compare the plots in the future.
7 Inhibit Status Shows all possible active causes of inhibit status.
8 Motor stop cause Shows all possible active causes for motor stop.
9 Read time from MCOMP Shows the time setting present in the Relay
10 Write PC time to MCOMP Sets the PC date and time in to the Relay
11 Clear Thermal memory Clears the thermal content stored in the Relay
12 Clear Energy values Clears all the Energy values stored in the Relay
13 Reset Number Start Command Clears number of starts stored in the Relay
14 Reset Number Stops Command Clears number of stops stored in the Relay
15 Reset Trip Counter Command Clears number of trips stored in the Relay
16 Reset Event Record Counter Command Clears number of events stored in the Relay
17 Reset Motor Run Hours Command Clears the motor run hours value stored in the Relay
18 Reset Total Motor Run Hours Command Clears the Total motor run hours value stored in the Relay
Table 10-3: Special Commands

Inhibit Status
Table 10 4 shows a list of all possible inhibit causes shown by the Relay.
Sr No. Commands Description

1 No Voltage The Relay senses voltage in all 3-phases < 10%.
2 Under Voltage The Relay senses an under-voltage pick-up condition.
3 Trip The Relay is in trip mode.
4 Thermal Capacity Thermal capacity > Set threshold limit.
5 Max. No. of starts No. of starts > Set permissible limit in the set reference period.
6 No Stop Input DI configured as STOP is low.
7 Interlock 1
8 Interlock 2
9 Interlock 3
10 Interlock 4
11 Interlock 5
12 Interlock 6 DI configured as INTERLOCK STOP is low.
13 Interlock 7
14 Interlock 8
15 Interlock 9
16 Interlock 10
17 Interlock 11
18 Interlock 12
19 Communication Stop Stop from communication is high
Table 10-4: Inhibit Status
Motor Stop Cause
Table 10 5 shows a list of all possible Motor stop causes shown

by the Relay.
Sr No. Commands
1 Motor stopped through trip.
2 Motor stopped through the HMI/Display stop command.
3 Motor stopped through the digital input: Stop.
4 Motor stopped through the Digital Input: EStop.
5 Motor stopped through the communication stop command.
6 Motor stopped through the Interlock 1 configured as Stop.
Table 10-5 (1): Motor Stop Cause

Sr No. Commands
18 Motor stopped through the Contactor Feedback 1 input.
19 Motor stopped through Contactor Feedback 2 input.
20 Motor stopped through the Auto Stop by no voltage.
21 Motor stopped through the Auto Stop by no current.
22 Motor stopped as Start1 DI not maintained.
Table 10-5 (2): Motor Stop Cause

ANNEXURE

ANNEXURE A - MEMORY MAPS
Overview trip & event record parameters, DI/DO status and coil status.
Function codes for different registers are also mentioned in the
The Relay supports three communication protocols as Modbus
memory map. The Modbus RTU memory map shows the
serial, Pro bus DP and Modbus over TCP/IP. The memory map for
addresses for slow scan parameters. The addresses for fast scan
all these communication protocols is described below.
parameters will range from 30001 to 30016 and cannot be
changed. Different parameters can be con gured as fast scan
A] Modbus RTU Memory Map parameters at these addresses through MCOMP Suite.
Modbus RTU memory map enlists all the metering parameters,
Range of data Scale Size

Settings Modbus Factor in
Unit Notes
Address Min Max (SF) Bytes
Input Register (Function code : 0x04)
Metering Data
Instantaneous RMS Current
R Phase Current 31001 0 60000 0.1 A 2

SF=0.001 for IFLC < 4A
Y Phase Current 31002 0 60000 0.1 A 2 SF=0.01 for IFLC < 20A
SF=0.1 for IFLC > 20A
B Phase Current 31003 0 60000 0.1 A 2
Type: Vector Sum

==============
SF = 1 for IFLC 4A
SF = 10 for IFLC 20 A
Earth Current 31004 0 60000 0.1 A 2 SF = 100 for IFLC 80 A
SF = 1000 for IFLC > 80 A
Type: CBCT
==============
SF = 1
One Second RMS Average Current
R Phase Current 31005 0 60000 0.1 A 2

SF=0.001 for IFLC < 4A
Y Phase Current 31006 0 60000 0.1 A 2 SF=0.01 for IFLC < 20A
SF=0.1 for IFLC > 20A
B Phase Current 31007 0 60000 0.1 A 2
Type: Vector Sum

==============
SF = 1 for IFLC 4A
SF = 10 for IFLC 20 A
Earth Current 31008 0 60000 1 mA 2 SF = 100 for IFLC 80 A
Type: CBCT
==============
SF = 1
SF = 0.001 for IFLC 4A

Average RMS
31009 0 60000 1 mA 2 SF = 0.01 for IFLC 20 A
Phase Current
SF = 0.1 for IFLC > 20 A
Instantaneous RMS Phase Voltage
R Phase Current 31010 0 3500 0.1 V 2 -
Y Phase Current 31011 0 3500 0.1 V 2 -
Table A-1 (1): Modbus Memory Map

MEMORY MAPS

Unit Notes
B Phase Current 31012 0 3500 0.1 V 2 -
Line Voltage
R-Y Line Voltage 31013 0 6500 0.1 V 2 -
Y-B Line Voltage 31014 0 6500 0.1 V 2 -
B-R Line Voltage 31015 0 6500 0.1 V 2 -
One Second RMS Average Voltage
R Phase Voltage 31016 0 3500 0.1 V 2 -
Y Phase Voltage 31017 0 3500 0.1 V 2 -
B Phase Voltage 31018 0 3500 0.1 V 2 -
Average RMS
31019 0 3500 0.1 V 2 -
Phase Voltage
Phase wise Active Power

R Phase MSW = 31021
31020 0 210000000 1 W 4
Active Power LSW = 31020
Y Phase MSW = 31023
31022 0 210000000 1 W 4
B Phase MSW = 31025
31024 0 210000000 1 W 4
Phase wise Reactive Power

R Phase MSW = 31027
31026 0 210000000 1 VAR 4
Reactive Power LSW = 31026
Y Phase MSW = 31029
31028 0 210000000 1 VAR 4
B Phase MSW = 31031
31030 0 210000000 1 VAR 4
Phase wise Apparent Power

R Phase MSW = 31033
31032 0 210000000 1 VA 4
Apparent Power LSW = 31032
Y Phase MSW = 31035
31034 0 210000000 1 VA 4
B Phase MSW = 31037
31036 0 210000000 1 VA 4
Total Power
Total Active MSW = 31039
31038 0 210000000 1 W 4
Power LSW = 31038
Total Reactive MSW = 31041
31040 0 210000000 1 VAR 4
Power LSW = 31040
Total Apparent MSW = 31043
31042 0 210000000 1 VA 4
Power LSW = 31042

MEMORY MAPS

Unit Notes
Energy
Total Active MSW = 31039
31044 0 1.65564E+17 1/3600 Wh 8
Energy LSW = 31038
Total Reactive MSW = 31041
31048 0 1.65564E+17 1/3600 VARh 8
Energy LSW = 31040
Total Apparent MSW = 31043
31052 0 1.65564E+17 1/3600 VAh 8
Energy LSW = 31042
Other Data
Value = 0 for 1-2-3
(R-Y-B)
Phase Sequence 31056 0 1 - - 2
Value = 1 for 1-3-2
(R-B-Y)
Temperature 31057 0 2000 0.1 0
C 2 -
Frequency 31059 0 1000 0.1 Hz 2 -
Starting Time 31059 0 10000 0.1 Sec 2 -

Starting Peak
31060 0 60000 0.1 A 2 -
Current
Thermal MSW = 31062
31061 0 10000 0.1 % 4
Capacity LSW = 31061
0 = CM TYPE 1
1 = CM TYPE 2
CM Detect 2 = CM TYPE 3
31063 0 5 1 - 2
Number 3 = CM TYPE 4
4 = CM TYPE 5
5 = INTERNAL CM
Reserved 31064 0 1000 0.001 - 2 -
Motor Operation
Number Of MSW = 31069
31068 0 4294967296 1 - 4
Starts LSW = 31068
Number Of
31070 0 65535 1/60 Minutes 2 -
Hours Motor Run
Total Number Of MSW = 31072
31071 0 4294967296 1/60 Minutes 4
Hours Motor Run LSW = 31071
Last Start Amps 31073 0 60000 0.1 A 2 -
MSW = 31075
Number Of Stops 31074 0 4294967296 1 - 4
LSW = 31074
DI Status 31076 2
Digital Input 1 Value = 0 for low input
31076.0 0 1 - - -
Status Value = 1 for high input

31076.1 0 1 - - -

31076.2 0 1 - - -

MEMORY MAPS

Unit Notes
31076.3 0 1 - - -
31076.4 0 1 - - -
31076.5 0 1 - - -
31076.6
Reserved To - - - - - Reserved
31076.15
DO Status 31077 2
Digital Output 1 Value = 0 for low Output
31077.0 0 1 - - -
Status Value = 1 for high Output
31077.1 0 1 - - -
31077.2 0 1 - - -
31077.3 0 1 - - -
31077.4
Reserved To - - - - - Reserved
31077.15
Flags 31078 2
0 = RTD Protection Enabled
Temp. Sensor 31078.0, 1 = PTC Protection Enabled
0 3 - - -
Type 31078.1 2 = Both RTD & PTC
Protections disabled
0 = 3Ph-4W System
System selection 31078.2 0 1 - - -
1 = 3Ph-3W System
0 = Voltage Connect Disabled
Voltage Connect Flag 31078.3 0 1 - - -
1 = Voltage Connect Enabled
% Current Unbalance 31079 0 10 0.1 % 2 -
Logic Status 31080 2

1 = Start command from
Contactor A 31080.0 0 1 - - - Contactor A
0 = Motor Off (Not running)
1 = Start command from
Contactor B 31080.1 0 1 - - - Contactor B
0 = Motor Off (Not running)
1 = Remote
Local/Remote 31080.2 0 1 - - -
0 = Local
DCS Start 1 = DCS Start Available
31080.3 0 1 - - -
Available 0 = DCS Start NOT Available
Drive Start 1 = Drive Available
31080.4 0 1 - - -
Available 0 = Drive NOT Available

MEMORY MAPS

Unit Notes
1 = Drive Running
Drive Running 31080.5 0 1 - - -
0 = Drive NOT Running
1 = Alarm
Alarm 31080.6 0 1 - - -
0 = No Alarm
1 = Fault (Trip)
Fault 31080.7 0 1 - - -
0 = No Fault (Trip)
31080.8
RESERVED to 0 1 - - - -
31080.15
Watchdog Register 31081 - - - - - -
Trip Records 32000
Trip Record 1
MSW = 32002
Trip Cause 32001 0 1048575 - - 4 LSW = 32001
Refer Trip Record Table
Date Format 32003 0 65535 - - 2 Refer Trip Record Table
MSW = 32005
Time Format 32004 0 134217727 - - 4 LSW = 32004
R Phase Current 32006 0 60000 0.1 A 2

SF = 0.001 for IFLC < 4 A
Y Phase Current 32007 0 60000 0.1 A 2 SF = 0.01 for IFLC < 20 A
B Phase Current 32008 0 60000 0.1 A 2
Type: Vector Sum

==============
SF = 1 for IFLC < 4 A
EF Current 32009 0 60000 1 mA 2 SF = 100 for IFLC < 80 A
Type: CBCT
==============
SF = 1
R Phase Voltage 32010 0 3500 0.1 V 2 -
Y Phase Voltage 32011 0 3500 0.1 V 2 -
B Phase Voltage 32012 0 3500 0.1 V 2 -
Frequency 32013 0 1000 0.1 Hz 2 -
If RTD temperature is enabled,

RTD Temperature 0 2000 0.1 0
C Temperature parameter holds
temperature in Degree Celsius.
32014 2 If PTC temperature protection
is enabled, Temperature
PTC Resistance 0 2000 1 Ω parameter hold PTC Trip
Resistance in ohms

MEMORY MAPS

Unit Notes
Power Factor 32015 0 1000 0.001 - 2 -

Current Scale Factor 32016 10 1000 1 - 2 SF = 0.01 for IFLC < 20 A
Type: Vector Sum

==============
Earth Current
32017 1 1000 1 - 2 SF = 100 for IFLC < 80 A
Scale Factor
Type: CBCT
==============
SF = 1
0 = RTD Temperature
Protection
32018.0 1 = PTC Temperature
Temp. Sensor
0 2 - - Protection
Type 32018.1 2 = RTD & PTC
Temperature Protection
Disabled
2
System 0 = 3Ph-4W System
32018.2 0 1 - -
Selection flag 0 = 3Ph-3W System
0 = Voltage Connect
Voltage Connect
32018.3 0 1 - - Disabled
Flag
1 = Voltage Connect
Enabled
Trip Record 2
MSW = 32020
Trip Cause 32019 0 1048575 - - 4 LSW = 32019
MSW = 32023
Time Format 32022 0 134217727 - - 4 LSW = 32022
R Phase Current 32024 0 60000 0.1 A 2

B Phase Current 32026 0 60000 0.1 A 2
Type: Vector Sum

==============
EF Current 32027 0 60000 1 mA 2 SF = 1000 for IFLC > 80 A
Type: CBCT
==============
SF = 1

MEMORY MAPS

Unit Notes
R Phase Voltage 32028 0 3500 0.1 V 2 -
Y Phase Voltage 32029 0 3500 0.1 V 2 -
B Phase Voltage 32030 0 3500 0.1 V 2 -
Frequency 32031 0 1000 0.1 Hz 2 -

0
RTD Temperature 0 2000 0.1 C Temperature parameter holds
Resistance in ohms
Power Factor 32033 0 1000 0.001 - 2 -

Type: Vector Sum

==============
Earth Current SF = 100 for IFLC < 80 A
32035 1 1000 1 - 2 SF = 1000 for IFLC > 80 A
Scale Factor
Type: CBCT
==============
SF = 1
0 = RTD Temperature
Protection
1 = PTC Temperature
Temp. Sensor 32036.0 Protection
0 2 - -
Type 2 = RTD & PTC
32036.1
Disabled
2
32036.2 0 1 - -
0 = Voltage Connect
Voltage Connect
32036.3 0 1 - - Disabled
Flag
1 = Voltage Connect
Enabled
Trip Record 3
MSW = 32038
Trip Cause 32037 0 1048575 - - 4 LSW = 32037
MSW = 32041
Time Format 32040 0 134217727 - - 4 LSW = 32040

MEMORY MAPS

Unit Notes
R Phase Current 32042 0 60000 0.1 A 2

B Phase Current 32044 0 60000 0.1 A 2
Type: Vector Sum

==============
Type: CBCT
==============
SF = 1
R Phase Voltage 32046 0 3500 0.1 V 2 -
Y Phase Voltage 32047 0 3500 0.1 V 2 -
B Phase Voltage 32048 0 3500 0.1 V 2 -
Frequency 32049 0 1000 0.1 Hz 2 -

Resistance in ohms
Power Factor 32051 0 1000 0.001 - 2 -

Type: Vector Sum

==============
32053 1 1000 1 - 2 SF = 100 for IFLC < 80 A
Scale Factor SF = 1000 for IFLC > 80 A
Type: CBCT
==============
SF = 1
0 = RTD Temperature
Protection
1 = PTC Temperature
Temp. Sensor 32054.0 Protection
0 2 - -
Type 2 2 = RTD & PTC
32054.1
Disabled
32054.2 0 1 - -

MEMORY MAPS

Unit Notes
0 = Voltage Connect
Voltage Connect
32054.3 0 1 - - Disabled
Flag 2
1 = Voltage Connect
Enabled
Trip Record 4
MSW = 32056
Trip Cause 32055 0 1048575 - - 4 LSW = 32055
MSW = 32059
Time Format 32058 0 134217727 - - 4 LSW = 32058
R Phase Current 32060 0 60000 0.1 A 2

B Phase Current 32062 0 60000 0.1 A 2
Type: Vector Sum

==============
Type: CBCT
==============
SF = 1
R Phase Voltage 32064 0 3500 0.1 V 2 -
Y Phase Voltage 32065 0 3500 0.1 V 2 -
B Phase Voltage 32066 0 3500 0.1 V 2 -
Frequency 32067 0 1000 0.1 Hz 2 -

Resistance in ohms
Power Factor 32069 0 1000 0.001 - 2 -


MEMORY MAPS

Unit Notes
Type: Vector Sum
==============
32071 1 1000 1 - 2 SF = 1000 for IFLC > 80 A
Scale Factor
Type: CBCT
==============
SF = 1
0 = RTD Temperature
Protection
Temp. Sensor 32072.0 1 = PTC Temperature
0 2 - - Protection
Type 32072.1 2 = RTD & PTC
Disabled
System 2 0 = 3Ph-4W System
32072.2 0 1 - -
0 = Voltage Connect
Voltage Connect
32072.3 0 1 - - Disabled
Flag
1 = Voltage Connect
Enabled
Trip Record 5
MSW = 32074
Trip Cause 32073 0 1048575 - - 4 LSW = 32073
MSW = 32077
Time Format 32076 0 134217727 - - 4 LSW = 32076
R Phase Current 32078 0 60000 0.1 A 2

B Phase Current 32080 0 60000 0.1 A 2
Type: Vector Sum

==============
Type: CBCT
==============
SF = 1
R Phase Voltage 32082 0 3500 0.1 V 2 -
Y Phase Voltage 32083 0 3500 0.1 V 2 -
B Phase Voltage 32084 0 3500 0.1 V 2 -
Frequency 32085 0 1000 0.1 Hz 2 -

MEMORY MAPS

Unit Notes

Resistance in ohms
Power Factor 32087 0 1000 0.001 - 2 -

Type: Vector Sum

==============
Earth Current
32089 1 1000 1 - SF = 100 for IFLC < 80 A
Scale Factor
Type: CBCT
==============
2 SF = 1
0 = RTD Temperature
Protection
32090.0 1 = PTC Temperature
Temp. Sensor
0 2 - - Protection
Type 32090.1 2 = RTD & PTC
Disabled

32090.2 0 1 - -
2 0 = Voltage Connect
Voltage Connect
32090.3 0 1 - - Disabled
Flag
1 = Voltage Connect
Enabled
MSW = 32092
Trip counter 32091 0 4294967296 - - 4
LSW = 32091
Event Records 33001
EVENT Record 1
MSW = 33002
LSW = 33001
Event Source 33001 0 1048575 - - 4
Refer Event Record
Table
Event Cause 33003 0 3 - - 2 Refer Event Record Table
Date Format 33004 0 65535 - - 2 Refer Event Record Table
MSW = 32006
Time Format 33005 0 134217727 - - 4 LSW = 32005
Refer Event Record Table

MEMORY MAPS

Unit Notes
EVENT Record 2
MSW = 33008
LSW = 33007
Event Source 33007 0 1048575 - - 4
Refer Event Record
Table
MSW = 32012
Time Format 33011 0 134217727 - - 4 LSW = 32011
EVENT Record 3
MSW = 33014
LSW = 33013
Event Source 33013 0 1048575 - - 4
Refer Event Record
Table
MSW = 32018
Time Format 33017 0 134217727 - - 4 LSW = 32017
EVENT Record 4
MSW = 33020
- - LSW = 33019
Event Source 33019 0 1048575 4
Refer Event Record
Table
MSW = 32024
Time Format 33023 0 134217727 - - 4 LSW = 32023
EVENT Record 5
MSW = 33026
- - LSW = 33025
Event Source 33025 0 1048575 4
Refer Event Record
Table
MSW = 32030
Time Format 33029 0 134217727 - - 4 LSW = 32029
MSW = 33032
Event Counter 33031 0 4294967296 - - 4
LSW = 33031

MEMORY MAPS
Event Source
The Relay stores last ve trip records in its non-volatile memory. set high and rest all other fault bits remain low. In healthy
The memory addressing format for date, time and trip cause is condition all bits will be in reset condition. The date and time of
shown in Table A 1. Bits in register are assigned unique fault fault will be stored in its corresponding address.
cause. When the motor trips, the corresponding fault bit(s) will be
Trip Records
Example for
Trip Cause
Trip Trip Trip Trip Trip Fast Scan; if
Record 1 Record 2 Record 3 Record 4 Record 5 address
configured as
MSW=32002 MSW=32020 MSW=32038 MSW=32056 MSW=32074 MSW=32012

........
LSW=32001 LSW=32019 LSW=32037 LSW=32055 LSW=32073 LSW=32011
Overload 32001.0 32019.0 32037.0 32055.0 32073.0 32011.0
Locked Rotor 32001.1 32019.1 32037.1 32055.1 32073.1 32011.1
Earth Fault 32001.2 32019.2 32037.2 32055.2 32073.2 32011.2
Under current 32001.3 32019.3 32037.3 32055.3 32073.3 32011.3
Current
32001.4 32019.4 32037.4 32055.4 32073.4 32011.4
Unbalance
Over Voltage 32001.5 32019.5 32037.5 32055.5 32073.5 32011.5
Under Voltage 32001.6 32019.6 32037.6 32055.6 32073.6 32011.6
Voltage
32001.7 32019.7 32037.7 32055.7 32073.7 32011.7
Unbalance
RTD Temperature 32001.8 32019.8 32037.8 32055.8 32073.8 32011.8
Over
32001.9 32019.9 32037.9 32055.9 32073.9 32011.9
Frequency
Under Frequency 32001.10 32019.10 32037.10 32055.10 32073.10 32011.10
Phase Loss 32001.11 32019.11 32037.11 32055.11 32073.11 32011.11
Phase Reversal 32001.12 32019.12 32037.12 32055.12 32073.12 32011.12
Excessive
32001.13 32019.13 32037.13 32055.13 32073.13 32011.13
Start Time
Successive Start 32001.14 32019.14 32037.14 32055.14 32073.14 32011.14
Interlock-1 32001.15 32019.15 32037.15 32055.15 32073.15 32011.15
MSW=32002 MSW=32020 MSW=32038 MSW=32056 MSW=32074 MSW=32012

........
LSW=32001 LSW=32019 LSW=32037 LSW=32055 LSW=32073 LSW=32011
Interlock-2 32002.0 32020.0 32038.0 32056.0 32074.0 32012.0
Interlock-3 32002.1 32020.1 32038.1 32056.1 32074.1 32012.1
Fail to Stop 32002.2 32020.2 32038.2 32056.2 32074.2 32012.2
Over Current 32002.3 32020.3 32038.3 32056.3 32074.3 32012.3
PTC Response
32002.4 32020.4 32038.4 32056.4 32074.4 32012.4
Resistance
Table A-2 (1): Trip Record Cause Table

MEMORY MAPS
Trip Records
Example for
Trip Cause
Trip Trip Trip Trip Trip Fast Scan; if
Record 1 Record 2 Record 3 Record 4 Record 5 address
configured as
PTC Short
32002.5 32020.5 32038.5 32056.5 32074.5 32012.5
Circuit
PTC Open
32002.6 32020.6 32038.6 32056.6 32074.6 32012.6
Circuit
Interlock 4 32002.7 32020.7 32038.7 32056.7 32074.7 32012.7
Interlock 5 32002.8 32020.8 32038.8 32056.8 32074.8 32012.8
Interlock 6 32002.9 32020.9 32038.9 32056.9 32074.9 32012.9
Interlock 7 32002.10 32020.10 32038.10 32056.10 32074.10 32012.10
Interlock 8 32002.11 32020.11 32038.11 32056.11 32074.11 32012.11
Interlock 9 32002.12 32020.12 32038.12 32056.12 32074.12 32012.12
Interlock 10 32002.13 32020.13 32038.13 32056.13 32074.13 32012.13
Interlock 11 32002.14 32020.14 32038.14 32056.14 32074.14 32012.14
Interlock 12 32002.15 32020.15 32038.15 32056.15 32074.15 32012.15
Trip Records Trip Trip Trip Trip Trip

Record 1 Record 2 Record 3 Record 4 Record 5
Address
Date Format
32003 32021 32039 32057 32075
32003.0 32021.0 32039.0 32057.0 32075.0
32003.1 32021.1 32039.1 32057.1 32075.1

Day 32003.2 32021.2 32039.2 32057.2 32075.2
32003.3 32021.3 32039.3 32057.3 32075.3
32003.4 32021.4 32039.4 32057.4 32075.4
32003.5 32021.5 32039.5 32057.5 32075.5
32003.6 32021.6 32039.6 32057.6 32075.6

Month
32003.7 32021.7 32039.7 32057.7 32075.7
32003.8 32021.8 32039.8 32057.8 32075.8
32003.9 32021.9 32039.9 32057.9 32075.9
32003.10 32021.10 32039.10 32057.10 32075.10
32003.11 32021.11 32039.11 32057.11 32075.11
Year 32003.12 32021.12 32039.12 32057.12 32075.12
32003.13 32021.13 32039.13 32057.13 32075.13
32003.14 32021.14 32039.14 32057.14 32075.14
32003.15 32021.15 32039.15 32057.15 32075.15

MEMORY MAPS
Trip Records Trip Trip Trip Trip Trip

MSW 32005 32023 32041 32059 32077
LSW 32004 32022 32040 32058 32076
Time Format
32004.0 32022.0 32040.0 32058.0 32076.0
32004.1 32022.1 32040.1 32058.1 32076.1
Hours 32004.2 32022.2 32040.2 32058.2 32076.2
32004.3 32022.3 32040.3 32058.3 32076.3
32004.4 32022.4 32040.4 32058.4 32076.4
32004.5 32022.5 32040.5 32058.5 32076.5
32004.6 32022.6 32040.6 32058.6 32076.6
Minutes 32004.7 32022.7 32040.7 32058.7 32076.7
32004.8 32022.8 32040.8 32058.8 32076.8
32004.9 32022.9 32040.9 32058.9 32076.9
32004.10 32022.10 32040.10 32058.10 32076.10
32004.11 32022.11 32040.11 32058.11 32076.11
32004.12 32022.12 32040.12 32058.12 32076.12
Reserved 32004.13 32022.13 32040.13 32058.13 32076.13
32004.14 32022.14 32040.14 32058.14 32076.14
32004.15 32022.15 32040.15 32058.15 32076.15
32005.0 32023.0 32041.0 32059.0 32077.0
32005.1 32023.1 32041.1 32059.1 32077.1
32005.2 32023.2 32041.2 32059.2 32077.2

Seconds
32005.3 32023.3 32041.3 32059.3 32077.3
32005.4 32023.4 32041.4 32059.4 32077.4
32005.5 32023.5 32041.5 32059.5 32077.5
32005.6 32023.6 32041.6 32059.6 32077.6
32005.7 32023.7 32041.7 32059.7 32077.7
32005.8 32023.8 32041.8 32059.8 32077.8
32005.9 32023.9 32041.9 32059.9 32077.9
32005.10 32023.10 32041.10 32059.10 32076.10

Milliseconds
32005.11 32023.11 32041.11 32059.11 32077.11
32005.12 32023.12 32041.12 32059.12 32077.12
32005.13 32023.13 32041.13 32059.13 32077.13
32005.14 32023.14 32041.14 32059.14 32077.14
32005.15 32023.15 32041.15 32059.15 32077.15

MEMORY MAPS
Event Record Table

The Relay stores last ve event records in its non-volatile memory. corresponding event bit(s) will be set high and rest all other event
The memory addressing format for date, time and event cause is bits will remain low. In healthy condition all bits will be in reset
shown in Table A 3 Bits in register are assigned unique event condition. The date and time of event will be stored in its
cause. In the occurrence of any pickup or alarm state, the corresponding address.
Event Records
Event Event Event Event Event

MSW 33002 33008 33014 33020 33026
LSW 33001 33007 33013 33019 33025
Event Source
Overload 33001.0 33007.0 33013.0 33019.0 33025.0
Locked Rotor 33001.1 33007.1 33013.1 33019.1 33025.1
Earth Fault 33001.2 33007.2 33013.2 33019.2 33025.2
Under current 33001.3 33007.3 33013.3 33019.3 33025.3
Current Unbalance 33001.4 33007.4 33013.4 33019.4 33025.4
Over Voltage 33001.5 33007.5 33013.5 33019.5 33025.5
Under Voltage 33001.6 33007.6 33013.6 33019.6 33025.6
Voltage Unbalance 33001.7 33007.7 33013.7 33019.7 33025.7
RTD Temperature 33001.8 33007.8 33013.8 33019.8 33025.8
Over Frequency 33001.9 33007.9 33013.9 33019.9 33025.9
Under Frequency 33001.10 33007.10 33013.10 33019.10 33025.10
Phase Loss 33001.11 33007.11 33013.11 33019.11 33025.11
Phase Reversal 33001.12 33007.12 33013.12 33019.12 33025.12
Excessive Start Time 33001.13 33007.13 33013.13 33019.13 33025.13
Successive Start 33001.14 33007.14 33013.14 33019.14 33025.14
Interlock-1 33001.15 33007.15 33013.15 33019.15 33025.15
Interlock-2 33002.0 33008.0 33014.0 33020.0 33026.0
Interlock-3 33002.1 33008.1 33014.1 33020.1 33026.1
Fail to Stop 33002.2 33008.2 33014.2 33020.2 33026.2
Over Current 33002.3 33008.3 33014.3 33020.3 33026.3
PTC Response
33002.4 33008.4 33014.4 33020.4 33026.4
Resistance
PTC Short Circuit 33002.5 33008.5 33014.5 33020.5 33026.5
PTC Open Circuit 33002.6 33008.6 33014.6 33020.6 33026.6
33002.7 33008.7 33014.7 33020.7 33026.7
Reserved 33002.8 33008.8 33014.8 33020.8 33026.8
33002.9 33008.9 33014.9 33020.9 33026.9
Table A-3 (1): Event Record Cause Table

MEMORY MAPS
Event Records

MSW 33002 33008 33014 33020 33026
LSW 33001 33007 33013 33019 33025
Event Source
33002.10 33008.10 33014.10 33020.10 33026.10
33002.11 33008.11 33014.11 33020.11 33026.11
33002.12 33008.12 33014.12 33020.12 33026.12

Reserved
33002.13 33008.13 33014.13 33020.13 33026.13
33002.14 33008.14 33014.14 33020.14 33026.14
33002.15 33008.15 33014.15 33020.15 33026.15
Address 33003 33009 33015 33021 33027
Event Cause
Alarm 33003.0 33009.0 33015.0 33021.0 33027.0
Pick up 33003.1 33009.1 33015.1 33021.1 33027.1
Event Records

Address 33003 33009 33015 33021 33027
Event Cause
33003.2 33009.2 33015.2 33021.2 33027.2
33003.3 33009.3 33015.3 33021.3 33027.3
33003.4 33009.4 33015.4 33021.4 33027.4
33003.5 33009.5 33015.5 33021.5 33027.5
33003.6 33009.6 33015.6 33021.6 33027.6
33003.7 33009.7 33015.7 33021.7 33027.7
33003.8 33009.8 33015.8 33021.8 33027.8

Reserved
33003.9 33009.9 33015.9 33021.9 33027.9
33003.10 33009.10 33015.10 33021.10 33027.10
33003.11 33009.11 33015.11 33021.11 33027.11
33003.12 33009.12 33015.12 33021.12 33027.12
33003.13 33009.13 33015.13 33021.13 33027.13
33003.14 33009.14 33015.14 33021.14 33027.14
33003.15 33009.15 33015.15 33021.15 33027.15

MEMORY MAPS
Event Records

Address
Date Format
33004 33010 33016 33022 33028
33004.0 33010.0 33016.0 33022.0 33028.0
33004.1 33010.1 33016.1 33022.1 33028.1
DAY 33004.2 33010.2 33016.2 33022.2 33028.2
33004.3 33010.3 33016.3 33022.3 33028.3
33004.4 33010.4 33016.4 33022.4 33028.4
33004.5 33010.5 33016.5 33022.5 33028.5
33004.6 33010.6 33016.6 33022.6 33028.6

MONTH
33004.7 33010.7 33016.7 33022.7 33028.7
33004.8 33010.8 33016.8 33022.8 33028.8
33004.9 33010.9 33016.9 33022.9 33028.9
33004.10 33010.10 33016.10 33022.10 33028.10
33004.11 33010.11 33016.11 33022.11 33028.11
YEAR 33004.12 33010.12 33016.12 33022.12 33028.12
33004.13 33010.13 33016.13 33022.13 33028.13
33004.14 33010.14 33016.14 33022.14 33028.14
33004.15 33010.15 33016.15 33022.15 33028.15
MSW 33006 33012 33018 33024 33030
LSW 33005 33011 33017 33023 33029
TIME FORMAT
33005.0 33011.0 33018.0 33023.0 33029.0
33005.1 33011.1 33018.1 33023.1 33029.1
HOURS 33005.2 33011.2 33018.2 33023.2 33029.2
33005.3 33011.3 33018.3 33023.3 33029.3
33005.4 33011.4 33018.4 33023.4 33029.4
33005.5 33011.5 33018.5 33023.5 33029.5
33005.6 33011.6 33018.6 33023.6 33029.6
33005.7 33011.7 33018.7 33023.7 33029.7

MINUTES
33005.8 33011.8 33018.8 33023.8 33029.8
33005.9 33011.9 33018.9 33023.9 33029.9
33005.10 33011.10 33018.10 33023.10 33029.10

MEMORY MAPS
Event Records

MSW 33006 33012 33018 33024 33030
LSW 33005 33011 33017 33023 33029
33005.11 33011.11 33018.11 33023.11 33029.11
33005.12 33011.12 33018.12 33023.12 33029.12
RESERVED 33005.13 33011.13 33018.13 33023.13 33029.13
33005.14 33011.14 33018.14 33023.14 33029.14
33005.15 33011.15 33018.15 33023.15 33029.15
33006.0 33012.0 33017.0 33024.0 33030.0
33006.1 33012.1 33017.1 33024.1 33030.1
33006.2 33012.2 33017.2 33024.2 33030.2

SECONDS
33006.3 33012.3 33017.3 33024.3 33030.3
33006.4 33012.4 33017.4 33024.4 33030.4
33006.5 33012.5 33017.5 33024.5 33030.5
33006.6 33012.6 33017.6 33024.6 33030.6
33006.7 33012.7 33017.7 33024.7 33030.7
33006.8 33012.8 33017.8 33024.8 33030.8
33006.9 33012.6 33017.9 33024.9 33030.9
33006.10 33012.10 33017.10 33024.10 33030.10

MILLISECONDS
33006.11 33012.11 33017.11 33024.11 33030.11
33006.12 33012.12 33017.12 33024.12 33030.12
33006.13 33012.13 33017.13 33024.13 33030.13
33006.14 33012.14 33017.14 33024.14 33030.14
33006.15 33012.15 33017.15 33024.15 33030.15
Note: The memory map provided in this manual is for basic version of the Relay. Memory map may change depending on the add-on/optional functions
present in the Relay. In such cases, the user is recommended to consult the manufacturer for the appropriate memory map by providing the Relay
rmware version.

MEMORY MAPS
B] Pro bus memory map Cyclic Data

Data which needs to be transmitted to Pro bus master on Table A-4 shows all cyclic read data available through relay on
communication needs to be selected in parameter mapping Pro bus communication to the Pro bus master. Different
setting using MCOMP suite software. List of available data for parameters for respective data are also shown in the table.
con guration in parameter mapping is discussed in cyclic data
section. If number of data selected is 14 bytes then accordingly
16I/2O modules needs to be selected from all the modules
available in GSD. GSD modules are discussed in Modules available
in GSD le.
All Cyclic read Data available to master (138 Input Byte)
Range of Data Scale

Size Event
Parameter Factor Unit
(Bytes) Record 5
Min Max (SF)
DF = 1000 (IFLC < 4 A)

R Phase
2 0 60000 0.1 A DF = 100 (IFLC < 20 A)
RMS Current
DF = 10 (IFLC > 20 A)
DF = 1000 (IFLC < 4 A)

Y Phase
2 0 60000 0.1 A DF = 100 (IFLC < 20 A)
RMS Current
DF = 10 (IFLC > 20 A)
DF = 1000 (IFLC < 4 A)

B Phase
2 0 60000 0.1 A DF = 100 (IFLC < 20 A)
RMS Current
DF = 10 (IFLC > 20 A)
Type: Vector Sum

==============
MF = 1 for IFLC < 4 A
MF = 10 for IFLC < 20 A
Earth RMS Current 2 0 60000 1 mA MF = 100 for IFLC < 80 A
MF = 1000 for IFLC > 80 A
Type: CBCT
==============
MF = 1
DF = 1000 (IFLC < 4 A)

Average RMS
2 0 60000 0.1 A DF = 100 (IFLC < 20 A)
Current
DF = 10 (IFLC > 20 A)
R Phase RMS
2 0 60000 0.1 V DF = 10
Voltage
Y Phase RMS
2 0 60000 0.1 V DF = 10
Voltage
B Phase RMS
2 0 60000 0.1 V DF = 10
Voltage
Table A-4 (1): Memory Map Pro bus

MEMORY MAPS
Range of Data Scale

Size Event
(Bytes) Record 5
Min Max (SF)
Average RMS
2 0 60000 0.1 V DF = 10
Voltage
Frequency 2 0 1000 0.1 Hz DF = 10
Power Factor 2 0 1000 0.001 - DF = 1000
Phase Value = 0 for 1-2-3 (R-Y-B)

2 0 60000 0.1 -
Sequence Value = 1 for 1-3-2 (R-B-Y)
Total Active
4 0 210000000 1 W MF = 1
Power
Total Reactive
4 0 210000000 1 VAR MF = 1
Power
Total Apparent
4 0 210000000 1 VA MF = 1
Power
Total Active
8 0 1.65564E+17 1 Wh MF = 1
Energy
Total Reactive
8 0 1.65564E+17 1 VARh MF = 1
Energy
Number of Start 4 0 4294967296 1 - MF = 1
Starting Time 2 0 10000 1/50 Sec DF = 50
Starting Peak
2 0 60000 0.1 A DF = 10
Current
Minutes
Hours Run 2 0 65535 1/60 DF = 60
5
Minutes
Total Hours Run 4 0 4294967296 1/60 DF = 60
5
Trip Counter 4 0 4294967296 1 - MF = 1
Trip Cause 4 0 1048575 - - Refer Trip Cause Table
Digital Input Refer Digital Input Status

2 0 - - -
Status Table
Digital Output Refer Digital Output Status

2 0 - - -
Status Table
Truth Table Refer Truth Table Output

2 0 - - -
Outputs Status Table
Signal Conditioners Refer Signal Conditioner

2 0 - - -
Outputs Output Status Table
Refer Counter Output Status

Counter Outputs 2 0 - - -
Table
Refer Timer Output Status

Timer Outputs 2 0 - - -
Table

MEMORY MAPS
Range of Data Scale

Size Event
(Bytes) Record 5
Min Max (SF)
Refer Motor Status

Motor Status 2 0 - - -
Table
Expansion Module Refer Expansion Module

2 0 - - -
Types Types Status Table
Expansion Module
2 0 - - -
1 status
Refer Expansion Digital
Expansion Module
2 0 - - - I/O Status
2 status
Table
Expansion Module
2 0 - - -
3 status
R-Y Line Voltage 2 0 - 1 V DF = 1
Y-B Line Voltage 2 0 - 1 V DF = 1
B-R Line Voltage 2 0 - 1 V DF = 1
Total Apparent
8 0 5.1246E+12 1 DF = 1
Energy
Temperature 2 0 2000/10000 0.1/1 °C/Ω DF = 10/1
Thermal Capacity 4 0 100 1 % DF = 1
Number Of Stop
4 0 4294967296 1 - DF = 1
Operations
% Current
2 0 100 1 % DF = 1
Unbalance
Refer Trip Cause Ext

Trip cause Ext 4 0 1048575 - -
Table
Refer Motor Stop Cause

Motor Stop cause 4 0 - - -
Table
Refer Motor Inhibit Cause

Motor Inhibit cause 4 0 - - -
Table
Refer Status word

Status Word 2 0 - - -
Table
DI-DO/ Timer/
Refer Combined word
Counter- Signal 2 0 - - -
Table
Conditioner

MEMORY MAPS
All cyclic write data available to master (2 bytes)
Parameter Bit Name Function
In case of momentary start mode:

other conditions are healthy
Forward start/ 0 = withdraw start command and does not stop the motor
Output Byte 0 0.0 Start1/ Low speed
start In case of maintained start mode:
0 = withdraw start command and stops the motor
1 = does not stop the motor/stop is healthy/release the stop

Output Byte 0 0.1 Stop
0 =stops the motor (true for both maintained and momentary mode)
In case of momentary start mode:

0 = withdraw start command and does not stop the motor
Reverse start/
Output Byte 0 0.2
High speed start
In case of maintained start mode:
0 = withdraw start command and stops the motor
Permissive 1 =set permissive output 1

Output Byte 0 0.3
command 1 0 =reset permissive output 1

Output Byte 0 0.4

Output Byte 0 0.5
When mode selection through communication is high then
Combination of bits 0.6 and 0.7 decides the mode selection

Local/remote (local 1, local 2, local 3, remote)
Output Byte 0 0.6
Mode selection 1
When mode selection through communication is low then relay
will ignore the bit status and shall not act depending on status of
these bits for mode selection.
When bit 0.6 = 0 and bit 0.7 = 0 then mode = local 1

Local/remote When bit 0.6 = 0 and bit 0.7 = 1 then mode = local 2
Output Byte 0 0.7
Mode selection 2 When bit 0.6 = 1 and bit 0.7 = 0 then mode = local 3
When bit 0.6 = 1 and bit 0.7 = 1 then mode = remote
1 = reset the fault/trip condition

Output Byte 1 1.0 Trip reset
0 = withdraws the trip reset command/no action
Clear thermal 1 = clears thermal memory

Output Byte 1 1.1
Memory 0 = withdraw clear thermal memory command/no action
Table A-5 (1): Cyclic write data

MEMORY MAPS
Parameter Bit Name Function
Clear number of 1 = clears number of start count

Output Byte 1 1.2
start count 0 = withdraw command/no action
Clear number of 1 = clears number of stop count

Output Byte 1 1.3
stop count 0 = withdraw command/no action
1 = clears hour run

Output Byte 1 1.4 Clear hour run
0 = withdraw command/no action
Clear total 1 = clears total hour run

Output Byte 1 1.5
hour run 0 = withdraw command/no action
1 = clears energy
Output Byte 1 1.6 Clear hour run
0 = withdraw command/no action
Output Byte 1 1.7 Reserved For future Use
Table A-5 (2): Cyclic write data
Data Representation
Digital Input Status
Profibus Data Index Bit Position Digital Input Channel # Remarks
x 0 to 7 Not applicable
6,7 Not applicable
5 DI Channel 6
4 DI Channel 5 0 = Input Low
x+1 3 DI Channel 4 1 = Input High
2 DI Channel 3
1 DI Channel 2
0 DI Channel 1
Table A-6: Digital Input Status

MEMORY MAPS
Digital Output Status
Profibus Data Index Bit Position Digital Output # Remarks
4 to 7 Not applicable
3 DO Channel 4 0 = Output Low
x+1 2 DO Channel 3 1 = Output High
1 DO Channel 2
0 DO Channel 1
Table A-7: Digital Output Status
Expansion Module Type Status
Profibus Data Index Bit Position Description Remarks
3 to 7 Reserved Reserved
2 Module 3 Status
x 0 = Output Low
1 Module 2 Status
1 = Output High
0 Module 1 Status
6,7 Reserved Reserved
5 01 - 8 DI Module
Module 3 Type
4 10 - 4DI 2DO Module
x+1 3 01 - 8 DI Module
Module 2 Type
1 01 - 8 DI Module
Module 1 Type
Table A-8: Expansion Module Type Status

MEMORY MAPS
Expansion Digital I/O Status
Profibus Data Index Bit Position Expansion Digital I/O Channel # Remarks
2 to 7 Reserved
Only if 4DI-2DO Module
1 DO Channel 2 0 = Output Low
x 1 = Output High
0 DO Channel 1
7 DI Channel 8
6 DI Channel 7
5 DI Channel 6
0 = Output Low
4 DI Channel 5 1 = Output High
x+1
3 DI Channel 4 (first four DI for 4DI/
2DO module)
2 DI Channel 3
1 DI Channel 2
0 DI Channel 1
Table A-9: Expansion Digital I/O Status
Truth Table Output Status
Profibus Data Index Bit Position Truth Table Output # Remarks
7 Truth Table 16
6 Truth Table 15
x
5 Truth Table 14
4 Truth Table 13
3 Truth Table 12
2 Truth Table 11
1 Truth Table 10
0 Truth Table 9 0 = Output Low

1 = Output High
7 Truth Table 8
6 Truth Table 7
5 Truth Table 6
4 Truth Table 5
x+1
3 Truth Table 4
2 Truth Table 3
1 Truth Table 2
0 Truth Table 1
Table A-10: Truth Table Output Status

MEMORY MAPS
Signal Conditioner Output
Profibus Data Index Bit Position Signal Conditioner Output # Remarks
2 to 7 Not applicable 0 = Output Low

x+1 1 Signal Conditioner 2 1 = Output High
0 Signal Conditioner 1
Table A-11: Signal Conditioner Output Status
Timer Output Status
Profibus Data Index Bit Position Timer Output # Remarks

x+1 1 Timer 2 1 = Output High
0 Timer 1
Table A-12: Timer Output Status
Counter Output Status
Profibus Data Index Bit Position Counter Output # Remarks

x+1 1 Counter 2 1 = Output High
0 Counter 1
Table A-13: Output Status
Combined word Status
Profibus Data Index Bit Position Channel # Remarks
7 Digital Output 2
6 Digital Output 1
5 Digital Input 6
4 Digital Input 5 0 = Low

x
1 = High
3 Digital Input 4
2 Digital Input 3
1 Digital Input 2
0 Digital Input 1
Table A-14 (1): Combined Word

MEMORY MAPS
Combined word Status
Profibus Data Index Bit Position Channel # Remarks
7 Signal Conditioner 2 output
6 Signal Conditioner 1 output
5 Counter 2 output
4 Counter 1 output 0 = Low

x+1
1 = High
3 Timer 2 output
2 Timer 1 output
1 Digital Output 4
0 Digital Output 3
Table A-14 (2): Combined Word
Motor Status
Profibus Data Index Bit Position Motor Status Bit # Remarks
x 0 to 7 Reversed Reversed
1 = motor running +
Iavg > 10% IFLC
7 Motor running_1
0 = motor stopped or
motor running +
Iavg < 10% IFLC
0 = high speed
6 Two Speed status
1 = low speed
1 = reverse direction
5 Motor Direction Status
0 = forward direction
x+1 1 = Pickup is present
4 Pickup Status
0 = No pickup
1 = Inhibit is present
3 Inhibit Status
0 = No Inhibit
1 = Alarm is present
2 Alarm Status
0 = No alarm
1 = Motor is tripped
1 Trip Status
0 = Motor is not tripped
1 = Motor is running
0 Motor Status
0 = Motor is stopped
Table A-15: Motor Status

MEMORY MAPS
Trip Cause
Profibus Size
Bit Position Min Value Max Value Trip Cause (If Particular bit in data=1)
Data Index (In Bytes)
7 0 1 Interlock - 12
6 0 1 Interlock 11
5 0 1 Interlock 10
4 0 1 Interlock 9
X 0
3 0 1 Interlock 8
2 0 1 Interlock 7
1 0 1 Interlock 6
0 0 1 Interlock 5
7 0 1 Interlock 4
6 0 1 PTC Open Circuit
5 0 1 PTC Short Circuit
4 0 1 PTC Response Resistance

X+1 1
3 0 1 Over current
2 0 1 Fail to Stop
1 0 1 Interlock 3
0 0 1 Interlock 2
7 0 1 Interlock 1
6 0 1 Successive Start
5 0 1 Excessive Start Time
4 0 1 Phase Reversal
X+2 1
3 0 1 Phase Loss
2 0 1 Under Frequency
1 0 1 Over Frequency
0 0 1 Temperature
7 0 1 Voltage Unbalance
6 0 1 Under Voltage
5 0 1 Over Voltage
4 0 1 Current Unbalance
X+3 1
3 0 1 Under Current
2 0 1 Earth Fault
1 0 1 Locked Rotor
0 0 1 Overload
Table A-16: Trip Cause

MEMORY MAPS
Trip Cause Ext
Profibus Size Trip Cause

Bit Position (In Bytes) Min Value Max Value (If Particular bit in data=1)
Data Index
x 0 to 7 1 NA NA Reserved
x+1 0 to 7 1 NA NA Reserved
x+2 0 to 7 1 NA NA Reserved
2 to 7 NA NA Reserved
x+1 1 1 0 1 Mode Change
0 0 1 Communication Failure
Table A-17: Trip Cause Ext
Inhibit Status
Profibus
Bit Position Inhibiting parameter Remarks
Data Index
x 0 to 7 Reserved
4 to 7 Reserved
3 Expansion unit failure

0 = No Inhibit
x+1 2 Stop from Communication
1 = Inhibit due to respective cause
1 Interlock 12
0 Interlock 11
7 Interlock 10
6 Interlock 09
5 Interlock 08
4 Interlock 07 0 = No Inhibit
x+2
3 Interlock 06 1 = Inhibit due to respective cause
2 Interlock 05
1 Interlock 04
0 Interlock 03
7 Interlock 02
6 Interlock 01
5 Digital input Stop
4 Maximum number of start 0 = No Inhibit

x+3
3 Thermal capacity 1 = Inhibit due to respective cause
2 Trip
1 Under Voltage
0 No Voltage
Table A-18: Inhibit Status

MEMORY MAPS
Stop Cause
Profibus
Bit Position Stopping parameter Remarks
Data Index
4 to 7 Reserved
3 Expansion unit failure stop
x 2 Profibus start 2 maintained stop 0 = No Stop
1 Profibus start 1 maintained stop 1 = Stopped due to respective cause
0 Interlock 12
7 Interlock 11
6 Interlock 10
5 Interlock 09
4 Interlock 08 0 = No Stop
x+1
3 Interlock 07 1 = Stopped due to respective cause
2 Interlock 06
1 Interlock 05
0 Interlock 04
7 Reserved
6 Start 4 Maintained stop
5 Start 3 Maintained stop
4 Start 2 Maintained stop 0 = No Stop

x+2
3 Start 1 Maintained stop 1 = Stopped due to respective cause
2 Current Auto Stop
1 Voltage Auto Stop
0 Contactor Feedback
7 Interlock 3
6 Interlock 2
5 Interlock 1
4 Stop from communication 0 = No Stop

x+3
3 Digital Input Emergency Stop 1 = Stopped due to respective cause
2 Digital Input Stop
1 MCOMP suite Stop(HMI)
0 Trip
7 User Configurable Defined by MCOMP suite HMI
6 User Configurable (Refer Chapter 7 Communication for
x
5 User Configurable parameters that can be defined in
4 User Configurable this status word.)
Table A-19 (1): Stop Cause

MEMORY MAPS
Status word
Profibus
Bit Position Description Remarks
Data Index
3 User Configurable
2 User Configurable
x
1 User Configurable
0 User Configurable
7 User Configurable Defined by MCOMP suite HMI
6 User Configurable (Refer Chapter 7 Communication for
5 User Configurable parameters that can be defined in
4 User Configurable this status word.)

x+1
3 User Configurable
2 User Configurable
1 User Configurable
0 User Configurable
Table A-19 (2): Stop Cause

MEMORY MAPS
Data Modules available in GSD le If there is mismatch between Number of Parameters

con gured/de ned by MCOMP suite HMI which de nes length of
There are various modules available in MCOMP Pro bus GSD le
transmitted data from Relay to Pro bus-Master and number of
which can be freely selected during con guration as per the
bytes requested by Pro bus-Master then there are two possible
requirement. The different modules have been de ned with x
cases as explained below:
size and exibility has been provided to user to con gure the data
in a sequence required as per application. By default 10 modules a) Length of data requested by Pro bus-Master > Con gured
are available in MOCMP GSD with pre-de ned bytes size as Parameter s length:
shown in Table A-20 and parameters for each of the modules In this case Relay will append unde ned (garbage) data after
needs to be con gured through MCOMP suite software. con gured/de ned parameter s data. Data of con gured
Customized module size can also be made available in the GSD parameters will not be affected.
le upon request without changing any MCOMP
hardware/ rmware provided respective MCOMP supports that b) Length of data requested by Pro bus-Master < Con gured
functionality. Parameter s length:
In this case Relay will only send data requested by Pro bus-
Note:
Master. Data frame will be clipped beyond length de ned by
Refer table A-2 for parameters that can be de ned in any of the data
module through MCOMP suite HMI. master which mean no data will come after requested number of
Refer Chapter 7: Communication, Pro bus Parameter mapping byte by Pro bus-Master are transmitted by Relay.
section for de ning the parameters which will be transmitted to
Pro bus master on communication network.
Data Modules in GSD
Sr. No. Data Module Name Description
1 2I/2O Module 2 Input bytes and 2 output bytes data exchange.
10 138I/2O(All Data) Module 138 Input bytes and 2 output bytes data exchange.
Table A-20 : Data modules in GSD

MEMORY MAPS
Acyclic Data
Table A-20 shows acyclic read data available through Relay to the column shown in table is de ned through MCOMP suite HMI and
Pro bus master on Pro bus communication network. Index is the sequence number of the de ned/con gured parameter.
Acyclic Data
Slot Index Parameter name Data Length
0 Defined by MCOMP Suite HMI R Phase RMS Current 2
0 Defined by MCOMP Suite HMI Y Phase RMS Current 2
0 Defined by MCOMP Suite HMI B Phase RMS Current 2
0 Defined by MCOMP Suite HMI Earth RMS Current 2
0 Defined by MCOMP Suite HMI Average RMS Current 2
0 Defined by MCOMP Suite HMI R Phase RMS Voltage 2
0 Defined by MCOMP Suite HMI Y Phase RMS Voltage 2
0 Defined by MCOMP Suite HMI B Phase RMS Voltage 2
0 Defined by MCOMP Suite HMI Average RMS Voltage 2
0 Defined by MCOMP Suite HMI Frequency 2
0 Defined by MCOMP Suite HMI Power Factor 2
0 Defined by MCOMP Suite HMI Phase Sequence 2
0 Defined by MCOMP Suite HMI Total Active Power 4
0 Defined by MCOMP Suite HMI Total Reactive Power 4
0 Defined by MCOMP Suite HMI Total Apparent Power 4
0 Defined by MCOMP Suite HMI Total Active Energy 8
0 Defined by MCOMP Suite HMI Total Reactive Energy 8
0 Defined by MCOMP Suite HMI Number of Start 4
0 Defined by MCOMP Suite HMI Starting Time 2
0 Defined by MCOMP Suite HMI Starting Peak Current 2
0 Defined by MCOMP Suite HMI Hours Run 2
0 Defined by MCOMP Suite HMI Total Hours Run 4
0 Defined by MCOMP Suite HMI Trip Counter 4
0 Defined by MCOMP Suite HMI Trip Cause 4
0 Defined by MCOMP Suite HMI Digital Input Status 2
0 Defined by MCOMP Suite HMI Digital Output Status 2
0 Defined by MCOMP Suite HMI Truth Tables Output 2
0 Defined by MCOMP Suite HMI Signal Conditioners Output 2
0 Defined by MCOMP Suite HMI Counter O/P 2
0 Defined by MCOMP Suite HMI Timer O/P 2
Table A-21 (1): Acyclic data (in case of DPV1)

MEMORY MAPS
Acyclic Data
Slot Index Parameter name Data Length
0 Defined by MCOMP Suite HMI Motor Status 2
0 Defined by MCOMP Suite HMI External Module Type 2
0 Defined by MCOMP Suite HMI External Module 1 Status 2
0 Defined by MCOMP Suite HMI R-Y Line Voltage 2
0 Defined by MCOMP Suite HMI Y-B Line Voltage 2
0 Defined by MCOMP Suite HMI B-R Line Voltage 2
0 Defined by MCOMP Suite HMI Total Apparent Energy 8
0 Defined by MCOMP Suite HMI Temperature 2
0 Defined by MCOMP Suite HMI Thermal Capacity 4
0 Defined by MCOMP Suite HMI Number Of Stop Operations 4
0 Defined by MCOMP Suite HMI % Current Unbalance 2
0 Defined by MCOMP Suite HMI Trip Cause Ext 4
0 Defined by MCOMP Suite HMI Stop Cause 2
0 Defined by MCOMP Suite HMI Inhibit Cause 2
0 Defined by MCOMP Suite HMI Status Word 2
0 Defined by MCOMP Suite HMI DI/DI/Timer/SignalCond/Counter 2
0 49 Trip Record 1 40
0 54 Event Record 1 16
0 59 254 Reserved -
0 255 Identification & Maintenance 68
Table A-21 (2): Acyclic data (in case of DPV1)
rmware version.

MEMORY MAPS
C] Modbus TCP/IP Memory Map

Table A 21 shows Modbus TCP/IP memory map.
Range of data Scale

Modbus Size in
Parameter Factor Unit Notes
Address Bytes
Min Max (SF)
LSW= Least Significant Word
MSW= Most Significant Word
Force Single Coil (Function code - 05)
Command Address(00001 00010)
Start Motor 00001 0 1 - - - 1 = Trigger Start Motor CMD
Stop Motor 00002 0 1 - - - 1 = Trigger Stop Motor CMD
Trip Reset 00003 0 1 - - - 1 = Trigger Trip Reset CMD
Start 2 Motor 00004 0 1 - - - 1 = Trigger Start 2 Motor CMD
Reset Thermal Memory 00005 0 1 - - - 1 = Trigger Reset Thermal Memory CMD
Store Factory Setting 00006 0 1 - - - 1 = Trigger Store Factory Setting CMD
Restore Factory Setting 00007 0 1 - - - 1 = Trigger Restore Factory Setting CMD
Capture Starting Curve 00008 0 1 - - - 1 = Trigger Capture Starting Curve CMD
MCOMP Reset 00009 0 1 - - - 1 = Trigger MCOMP Reset CMD
Clear Energy Value 00010 0 1 - - - 1 = Trigger Clear Energy Value CMD
Reset Number of Starts 00011 0 1 - - - 1 = Trigger Reset Number of Starts CMD
Reset Number of Stop 00012 0 1 - - - 1 = Trigger Reset Number of Stop CMD
Reset Motor Run Hrs 00013 0 1 - - - 1 = Trigger Reset Motor Run Hrs CMD
Reset Total Motor Run Hours 00014 0 1 - - - 1 = Trigger Reset Total Motor Run Hours CMD
Force Single Coil (Function code - 05)
Command Address (00001 00010)
1 = Motor Running
Motor Status 10001 0 1 - - -
0 = Motor Stopped
1 = MPR Tripped
Trip Status 10002 0 1 - - -
0 = MPR Not Tripped
1 = Alarm present
Alarm Status 10003 0 1 - - -
0 = No Alarm
1 = Inhibit present
Inhibit Status 10004 0 1 - - -
0 = No Inhibit
1 = Pickup present
Pickup Status 10005 0 1 - - -
0 = No Pickup
1 = Store Factory Settings CMD Executed

Store Factory Settings 10006 0 1 - - -
0 = Store Factory Settings CMD Not Executed
1 = Restore Factory Settings CMD Executed

Restore Factory Settings 10007 0 1 - - -
0 = Restore Factory Settings CMD Not Executed
Table A-22 (1): MODBUS TCP/IP Memory map.

MEMORY MAPS
Range of data Scale

Modbus Size in
Address Bytes
Min Max (SF)
1 = Capture Starting Curve CMD Executed

Capture Starting Curve 10008 0 1 - - -
0 = Capture Starting Curve CMD Not Executed
1 = Thermal Memory CMD Executed

Thermal Memory 10009 0 1 - - -
0 = Thermal Memory CMD not Executed
1 = RTC Write CMD Executed

RTC Write 10010 0 1 - - -
0 = RTC Write CMD Not Executed
1 = MPR is Calibrated
Calibration 10011 0 1 - - -
0 = MPR is not Calibrated
1 = EEPROM File System is working

EEPROM File System 10012 0 1 - - -
0 = EEPROM File System is not working
1 = I2C RTC Fail

I2C RTC Fail 10013 0 1 - - -
0 = I2C RTC Working
1 = I2C EEPROM Fail

I2C EEPROM FAIL 10014 0 1 - - -
0 = I2C EEPROM Working
1 = Reverse
RDOL Direction Status 10015 0 1 - - -
0 = Forward
Reserved 10016 0 1 - - - -
1 = No Voltage Inhibit Occurred (Voltage Connect
RDOL Direction Status 10017 0 1 - - - Enable but Applied Voltage is less than 10 % Vn)
0 = No voltage inhibit not occurred
1 = Under-voltage alarm inhibit occurred (Voltage
Under-voltage Alarm Connect Enable but Applied Voltage is less than
10018 0 1 - - -
Inhibit Status Under voltage Alarm Set Value & Above 10 % Vn)
0 = Under-voltage alarm inhibit not occurred
1 = Motor is in Trip condition &

Trip Inhibit Status 10019 0 1 - - -
not Reset; 0 otherwise
1 = Thermal memory Inhibit status occurred

Thermal Memory
10020 0 1 - - - (Thermal Memory > 30%)
Inhibit Status
0 = Thermal memory Inhibit status not Occurred
1 = Max no. of start inhibit occurred (Max
Max Number Start Number of Starts exceeds Permissive Starts &
10021 0 1 - - -
Inhibit Status Inhibit Period is not finish)
0 = Max no. of start inhibit not occurred
1 = Digital I/P Stop Inhibit Status occurred (One
Digital I/P Stop of DI configure as STOP input & Valid STOP
10022 0 1 - - -
Inhibit Status input is not applied)
0 = Digital I/P Stop Inhibit Status not occurred
1 = Interlock 1 Inhibit occurred (Interlock 1
Interlock 1 Inhibit
10023 0 1 - - - configured as STOP input is absent)
Status
0 = Interlock 1 Inhibit not occurred
Interlock 2 Inhibit
Status

MEMORY MAPS
Range of data Scale

Modbus Size in
Address Bytes
Min Max (SF)

Interlock 3 Inhibit
Status
Read Input Registers (Function Code - 04)
The metering data, trip & event record data addresses are same as mentioned in Modbus RTU map.
Ethernet Module Software Version (33151 - 33152)
ETHERNET SW VERSION
Minor 33151 0 65535 - - 2 -
Major 33152 0 65535 - - 2 -
Read/Write Register (Function Code - 03)
Protection Settings Address (40041 - 40137)
Overload Protection
Overload pick up 40041 200 1000 10 % 2 -
Pickup Set
Value -(Pickup
Overload pick up 40042 Set Value 10 % 2 -
*Current
Band/1000)
Alarm pick up 40043 800 1000 10 % 2 -
Pickup Set
Value -(Pickup
Alarm reset 40044 Set Value 10 % 2 -
*Current
Band/1000)
Thermal Memory
10045 5 30 1 % 2 -
Reset Value
Thermal Inhibit Set 40046 30 95 - % 2 -
Pause Time Delay

10047 50 60000 50 Sec 2 -
Setting
Bit 0: 0 = Disable;
Thermal memory (TM) 1 = Enable
ON/OFF:1 (Bit 0) Bit 1: 0 = Disable;
Alarm (AL) ON/OFF:1 1 = Enable
TM = 0 TM = 1
(Bit 1) Bit 2: 0 = Disable;
AL = 0 AL = 1
Pause Settings (PS) 1 = Enable
PS = 0 PS = 1
ON OFF:1 (Bit 2) Bit 8: 0 = Disable;
40048 MRL = 0 MRL = 1 - - 2
Reserved: (bit 3 to bit 7) 1 = Enable
MRR = 0 MRR = 1
Modes of Reset (MRL): Bit 9: 0 = Disable;
MRC = 0 MRC = 1
Local/Manual:1 (Bit 8) 1 = Enable
MRA = 0 MRA = 1
Modes of Reset (MRR): Bit 10: 0 = Disable;
Remote: 1 1 = Enable
1 = Enable

MEMORY MAPS
Range of data Scale

Modbus Size in
Address Bytes
Min Max (SF)
Modes of Reset (MRC):

Communication/Serial:1
(Bit 10)
Modes of Reset (MRA):
Auto:1
(Bit 11)
Locked Rotor Protection
Locked Rotor pick up 40049 1500 10000 10 % 2 -
Pickup Set Value -

Locked Rotor pick (Pickup Set Value*
40050 10 % 2 -
up reset Current Hysteresis
Band/1000)
Locked Rotor Alarm Set 40051 900 900 10 % 2 -
Pickup Set Value -

Locked Rotor Alarm (Pickup Set Value*
40052 10 % 2 -
Reset Current Hysteresis
Band/1000)
Locked Rotor Trip Delay 40053 25 1500 50 Sec 2 -
Mode: Alarm (AL): 1

Mode: Trip (TR):1 1 = Enable
Reserved:(Bit 2 to Bit 7) AL = 0 AL = 1 1 = Enable
Modes of Reset: TR = 0 TR = 1 Bit 8: 0 = Disable;
Local (MRL): 1 (Bit 8) MRL = 0 MRL = 1 1 = Enable
Modes of Reset: 40054 - - 2
MRR = 0 MRR = 1 Bit 9: 0 = Disable;
Remote (MRR): 1 (Bit 9) MRC = 0 MRC = 1 1 = Enable
Modes of Reset: MRA = 0 MRA = 1 Bit 10: 0 = Disable;
Communication/Serial 1 = Enable
(MRC): 1 (Bit 10) Bit 11: 0 = Disable;
Modes of Reset: Auto 1 = Enable
(MRA): 1
(Bit 11)
Under Voltage Protection
Under Voltage pick up 40055 20 850 10 % 2 -
Pickup Set Value -

Under Voltage pick (Pickup Set Value*
40056 10 % 2 -
Band/1000)
Under Voltage Alarm Set 40057 1100 1100 10 % 2 -

MEMORY MAPS
Range of data Scale

Modbus Size in
Address Bytes
Min Max (SF)
Pickup Set Value -

Under Voltage Alarm (Pickup Set Value *
40058 10 % 2 -
Band/1000)
Under Voltage Trip Delay 40059 10 1250 50 Sec 2 -
Mode: Alarm (AL): 1

(Bit 0)
Bit 0: 0 = Disable;
Mode: Trip (TR):1
1 = Enable
(Bit 1)
Bit 1: 0 = Disable;
Reserved:(Bit 2 to Bit 7)
AL = 0 AL = 1 1 = Enable
Modes of Reset:
TR = 0 TR = 1 Bit 8: 0 = Disable;
Local (MRL): 1 (Bit 8)
MRL = 0 MRL = 1 1 = Enable
Remote (MRR): 1 (Bit 9)
MRC = 0 MRC = 1 1 = Enable
Modes of Reset:
MRA = 0 MRA = 1 Bit 10: 0 = Disable;
Communication/Serial
1 = Enable
(MRC): 1 (Bit 10)
Bit 11: 0 = Disable;
Modes of Reset: Auto
1 = Enable
(MRA): 1
(Bit 11)
Current Unbalance Protection
Current Unbalance pick up 40061 50 1000 10 % 2 -
Pickup Set Value -

Under Voltage pick (Pickup Set Value*
40062 10 % 2 -
Band/1000)
Under Voltage Alarm Set 40063 850 1000 10 % 2 -
Pickup Set Value -

Under Voltage Alarm (Pickup Set Value *
40064 10 % 2 -
Band/1000)
Under Voltage Trip Delay 40065 50 1500 50 Sec 2 -
Mode: Alarm (AL): 1 Bit 0: 0 = Disable;

(Bit 0) AL = 0 AL = 1 1 = Enable
Mode: Trip (TR):1 TR = 0 TR = 1 Bit 1: 0 = Disable;
(Bit 1) MRL = 0 MRL = 1 1 = Enable
40066 - - 2
Reserved:(Bit 2 to Bit 7) MRR = 0 MRR = 1 Bit 8: 0 = Disable;
Modes of Reset: MRC = 0 MRC = 1 1 = Enable
Local (MRL): 1 (Bit 8) MRA = 0 MRA = 1 Bit 9: 0 = Disable;
1 = Enable

MEMORY MAPS
Range of data Scale

Modbus Size in
Address Bytes
Min Max (SF)
Modes of Reset:
Modes of Reset: Bit 10: 0 = Disable;
Communication/Serial 1 = Enable
(MRC): 1 (Bit 10) Bit 11: 0 = Disable;
Modes of Reset: Auto 1 = Enable
(MRA): 1
(Bit 11)
RTD Temperature pick up 250 1800 10 ºC RTD Pickup Set value

40067 2
PTC Response resistance 2700 4000 1 Ω -
RTD Temperature Pick

RTD Pickup set 5 10 ºC -
up Reset 40068 2
PTC Reset Resistance 1600 2500 1 Ω -
RTD Temperature
40069 RTD Pickup set 20 10 ºC 2 -
Alarm Set
RTD Temperature
40070 RTD Pickup set 25 10 ºC 2 -
Alarm Reset
RTD Temperature
250 12500 -
Trip Delay 40071 50 Sec 2
PTC Trip delay 5 3000 -
Mode: Alarm (AL):1

(Bit 0)
Mode: Trip (TR):1 Bit 0: 0 = Disable;
(Bit 1) 1 = Enable
Temperature Sensor Bit 1: 0 = Disable;
Type (SEN): (Bit 2) 1 = Enable
Reserved: (Bit 3 to Bit 7) Bit 2: 0 = RTD;
Modes of Reset: MRL = 0 MRL = 1 1 = PTC
Local (MRL): 1 (Bit 8) MRR = 0 MRR = 1 Bit 8: 0 = Disable;
40072 - - 2
Modes of Reset: MRC = 0 MRC = 1 1 = Enable
Remote (MRR): 1 (Bit 9) MRA = 0 MRA = 1 Bit 9: 0 = Disable;
Modes of Reset: 1 = Enable
Communication/Serial Bit 10: 0 = Disable;
(MRC): 1 (Bit 10) 1 = Enable
Modes of Reset: Bit 11: 0 = Disable;
Auto (MRA): 1 (Bit 11) 1 = Enable
Under current Protection
Under current pick up 40073 300 850 10 % 2 -
Pickup Set Value -

Under current pick (Pickup Set Value*
40074 10 % 2 -
up reset Current Band/
1000)

MEMORY MAPS
Range of data Scale

Modbus Size in
Address Bytes
Min Max (SF)
Under current Alarm Set 40075 1100 1100 10 % 2 -
Pickup Set Value -

Under current Alarm (Pickup Set Value *
40076 10 % 2 -
Reset Current Band/
1000)
Under current Trip Delay 40077 50 6000 50 Sec 2 -
Mode: Alarm (AL): 1

(Bit 0)
Bit 0: 0 = Disable;
Mode: Trip (TR):1
1 = Enable
(Bit 1)
Bit 1: 0 = Disable;
Modes of Reset:
Modes of Reset:
1 = Enable
(MRC): 1 (Bit 10)
1 = Enable
(MRA): 1
(Bit 11)
Earth Fault Protection
0 = Vector Sum
1 = CBCT
If user Select
Vector Sum
Pickup Set Range =
E/F Type 40079 0 1 - - 2
25 to 500% of IFLC
CBCT
Pickup Set Range =
0.1 to 20 A
Default = 0.1 A
200 5000 10 % -
E/F pick up 40080 or 2
1 200 10 A -
Pickup Set Value -

(Pickup Set Value *
E/F pick up Reset 40081 10 % 2 -
Current
Band/1000)
900 900
E/F Alarm pick up 40082 10 % 2 -
1 200
Pickup Set Value -

(Pickup Set Value *
E/F Alarm Reset 40083 10 % 2 -
Current
Band/1000)

MEMORY MAPS
Range of data Scale

Modbus Size in
Address Bytes
Min Max (SF)
Trip Delay/Trip Delay 0 3000 50

40084 Sec 2 -
(RUN) 0 3000 50
Trip Delay (Start) 40085 0 1250 50 Sec 2
This delay is applicable if user

Alarm Delay (Start) 40086 0 3000 50 Sec 2
select E/F Type as CBCT
Alarm Delay (Run) 40087 0 3000 50 Sec 2
Mode: Alarm (AL): 1

(Bit 0)
Bit 0: 0 = Disable;
Mode: Trip (TR):1
1 = Enable
(Bit 1)
Bit 1: 0 = Disable;
Modes of Reset:
Modes of Reset:
1 = Enable
(MRC): 1 (Bit 10)
1 = Enable
(MRA): 1
(Bit 11)
Voltage Unbalance Protection
Voltage Unbalance
40089 50 500 10 % 2 -
pick up
Pickup Set Value -

(Pickup Set Value
Voltage Unbalance
40090 * 10 % 2 -
pick up reset
Current Hysteresis
Band/1000)
Voltage Unbalance
40091 900 900 10 % 2 -
Alarm Set
40092
Pickup Set Value -
Voltage Unbalance (Pickup Set Value *
10 % 2 -
Alarm Reset Current Hysteresis
40093
Band/1000)
Voltage Unbalance
10 1000 50 Sec 2 -
Trip Delay

MEMORY MAPS
Range of data Scale

Modbus Size in
Address Bytes
Min Max (SF)
Mode: Alarm (AL): 1

(Bit 0)
Bit 0: 0 = Disable;
Mode: Trip (TR):1
1 = Enable
(Bit 1)
Bit 1: 0 = Disable;
Modes of Reset:
Modes of Reset:
1 = Enable
(MRC): 1 (Bit 10)
1 = Enable
(MRA): 1
(Bit 11)
Over Voltage Protection
Over Voltage
40095 1010 1300 10 % 2 -
pick up
Pickup Set Value -

(Pickup Set Value
Over Voltage pick
40096 * 10 % 2 -
up reset
Current Hysteresis
Band/1000)
Over Voltage
40097 950 950 10 % 2 -
Alarm Set
Pickup Set Value -

Over Voltage (Pickup Set Value *
40098 10 % 2 -
Band/1000)
Over Voltage
40099 10 1250 50 Sec 2 -
Trip Delay
Mode: Alarm (AL): 1

(Bit 0)
Bit 0: 0 = Disable;
Mode: Trip (TR):1
1 = Enable
(Bit 1)
Bit 1: 0 = Disable;
Modes of Reset:
Modes of Reset:
1 = Enable
(MRC): 1 (Bit 10)
1 = Enable
(MRA): 1
(Bit 11)

MEMORY MAPS
Range of data Scale

Modbus Size in
Address Bytes
Min Max (SF)
Under Frequency Protection
Under Frequency
40101 940 980 10 % 2 -
pick up
Pickup Set Value -

(Pickup Set Value
Under Frequency pick
40102 * 10 % 2 -
up reset
Current Hysteresis
Band/1000)
Under Frequency
40103 1010 1010 10 % 2 -
Alarm Set
Pickup Set Value -

Under Frequency (Pickup Set Value *
40104 10 % 2 -
Band/1000)
Under Frequency
40105 50 1500 50 Sec 2 -
Trip Delay
Mode: Alarm (AL): 1

(Bit 0)
Bit 0: 0 = Disable;
Mode: Trip (TR):1
1 = Enable
(Bit 1)
Bit 1: 0 = Disable;
Modes of Reset:
Modes of Reset:
1 = Enable
(MRC): 1 (Bit 10)
1 = Enable
(MRA): 1
(Bit 11)
Over Frequency Protection
Over Frequency
40107 1010 1050 10 % 2 -
pick up
Pickup Set Value -

(Pickup Set Value
Over Frequency
40108 * 10 % 2 -
pick up reset
Current Hysteresis
Band/1000)
Over Frequency
40109 990 990 10 % 2 -
Alarm Set
Pickup Set Value -

Over Frequency (Pickup Set Value *
40110 10 % 2 -
Band/1000)

MEMORY MAPS
Range of data Scale

Modbus Size in
Address Bytes
Min Max (SF)
Over Frequency
40111 50 1500 50 Sec 2 -
Trip Delay
Mode: Alarm (AL): 1

(Bit 0)
Bit 0: 0 = Disable;
Mode: Trip (TR):1
1 = Enable
(Bit 1)
Bit 1: 0 = Disable;
Modes of Reset:
Modes of Reset:
1 = Enable
(MRC): 1 (Bit 10)
1 = Enable
(MRA): 1
(Bit 11)
Mode (PR) Enable/

Disable: 1 (Bit 0)
Phase Sequence (PS)
setting: 1 (Bit 1) Bit 0: 0 = Disable;
Reserved: (Bit 2 to 1 = Enable
Bit 7) Bit 1: 0 = 1-2-3 (R Y
Modes of Reset AL = 0 AL = 1 B); 1 = 1-3-2 (R B Y)
(MRL): Local: 1 (Bit 8) TR = 0 TR = 1 Bit 8: 0 = Disable;
Modes of Reset MRL = 0 MRL = 1 1 = Enable
40113 - - 2
(MRR): Remote: 1 MRR = 0 MRR = 1 Bit 9: 0 = Disable;
(Bit 9) MRC = 0 MRC = 1 1 = Enable
Modes of Reset MRA = 0 MRA = 1 Bit 10: 0 = Disable;
(MRC): 1 = Enable
Communication/ Bit 11: 0 = Disable;
Serial: 1 (Bit 10) 1 = Enable
Modes of Reset
(MRA): Auto:1
(Bit 11)
Phase Loss Protection
Phase Loss Trip Delay 40114 5 1500 50 Sec 2 -
Trip Delay (TD)

Enable/Disable: 1
Bit 0: 0 = Disable;
(Bit 0)
1 = Enable
Reserved: (Bit 1 to
Bit 1: 0 = Disable;
Bit 7)
1 = Enable
Modes of Reset TD = 0 TD = 1
Bit 8: 0 = Disable;
(MRL): Local: 1 (Bit 8) MRL = 0 MRL = 1
1 = Enable
Modes of Reset (MRR): 40115 MRR = 0 MRR = 1 - - 2
Bit 9: 0 = Disable;
Remote: 1 (Bit 9) MRC = 0 MRC = 1
1 = Enable
Modes of Reset (MRC): MRA = 0 MRA = 1
Communication/ Serial:
1 = Enable
1 (Bit 10)
Modes of Reset
1 = Enable
(MRA): Auto:1
(Bit 11)

MEMORY MAPS
Range of data Scale

Modbus Size in
Address Bytes
Min Max (SF)
Re Acceleration
Voltage Dip 40116 200 950 10 % 2 -
Voltage
40117 650 950 10 % 2 -
Restoration
Re Acceleration
40118 10 3000 50 Sec 2 -
restart time
Re Acceleration
40119 200 60000 50 Sec 2 -
restart delay
Bit 0:
Re Acceleration
0 = Disable
Enable/Disable: 1
1 = Enable
(Bit 0) 40120 0 1 - - 2
Bit 1:
Aux & Motor Supply:
0 = Same;
1 (Bit 1)
1 = Separate
Max number of Start Protection
Reference period 40121 45000 180000 3000 Min 4 -
Permissive starts 40122 1 30 1 - 2 -
Inhibit period 40123 3000 360000 3000 Min 4 -
Max Start (SS)

Enable/Disable: 1
(Bit 0)
Bit 0: 0 = Disable;
Reserved: (Bit 1 to
1 = Enable
Bit 7)
Bit 8: 0 = Disable;
Modes of Reset SS = 0 SS = 1
1 = Enable
(MRL): Local: 1 (Bit 8) MRL = 0 MRL = 1
Bit 9: 0 = Disable;
Modes of Reset 40126 MRR = 0 MRR = 1 - - 2
1 = Enable
(MRR): Remote: 1(Bit 9) MRC = 0 MRC = 1
Modes of Reset MRA = 0 MRA = 1
1 = Enable
(MRC):
Communication/Serial:
1 = Enable
1 (Bit 10)
Modes of Reset(MRA):
Auto:1 (Bit 11)
Excessive Start Time Protection
Excessive Start Time Bit 0: 0 = Disable;

Protection (ESTP) 1 = Enable
TD = 0 TD = 1
Enable/Disable: 1 Bit 1: 0 = Disable;
MRL = 0 MRL = 1
(Bit 0) 1 = Enable
40128 MRR = 0 MRR = 1 - - 2
Modes of Reset Bit 8: 0 = Disable;
MRC = 0 MRC = 1
(MRL): Local: 1 (Bit 8) 1 = Enable
MRA = 0 MRA = 1
Modes of Reset Bit 9: 0 = Disable;
(MRR): Remote: 1 1 = Enable

MEMORY MAPS
Range of data Scale

Modbus Size in
Address Bytes
Min Max (SF)
Excessive Start Time Protection
(Bit 9)
Modes of Reset
(MRC): Bit 10: 0 = Disable;
Communication/ 1 = Enable
Serial:1 (Bit 10) Bit 11: 0 = Disable;
Modes of Reset 1 = Enable
(MRA): Auto: 1
(Bit 11)
Hysteresis Band settings
Current 40129 30 150 10 % 2 -
Voltage 40130 30 150 10 % 2 -
Frequency 40131 30 150 10 % 2 -
Under current Protection
Over current pick up 40132 500 10000 10 % 2 -
Pickup Set Value -

Over current pick (Pickup Set Value*
40133 10 % 2 -
up reset Current Band/
1000)
Over current
40134 900 900 10 % 2 -
Alarm Set
Pickup Set Value -

Over current (Pickup Set Value *
40135 10 % 2 -
Alarm Reset Current Band/
1000)
Over current
40136 5 500 50 Sec 2 -
Trip Delay
Mode: Alarm (AL): 1

(Bit 0)
Bit 0: 0 = Disable;
Mode: Trip (TR):1
1 = Enable
(Bit 1)
Bit 1: 0 = Disable;
Modes of Reset:
Modes of Reset:
1 = Enable
(MRC): 1 (Bit 10)
Modes of Reset:
1 = Enable
Auto (MRA): 1
(Bit 11)

MEMORY MAPS
Range of data Scale

Modbus Size in
Address Bytes
Min Max (SF)
System Settings Address (40151 - 40177)
Motor Settings
Full Load Current 40151 6 8000 10 A 2 -
Motor Voltage 40152 380 480 1 V 2 Setting must be 380 or 415 or 480
Auxiliary Supply 40153 24 230 1 V 2 -
Voltage connect 40154 0 1 1 - 2 0=Disable / 1=Enable
5 = Class 5
10 = Class 10
15 = Class 15
Trip Class 40155 5 40 1 - 2
20 = Class 20
25 = Class 25
30 = Class 30
Starting Time 40156 50 10000 50 Sec 2 -
Frequency selection 40157 500 600 10 Hz 2 50 Hz or 60 Hz
Running Current 40158 20 100 1 % 2 -
0 = 3 Phase 4 Wire
System type 40159 0 1 1 - 2
1 = 3 Phase 3 Wire
MCOMP Software
Software version 40163 0 9999 100 - 2 -
0-DOL
Type of starter 40164 0 4 1 - 2 1-RDOL
2-Star Delta
Max value of Time in star =
Time in Star 40165 50 1500 50 Sec 2
(Starting time -1) seconds
Chang Over Delay 40166 5 10000 50 Sec 2 -
Bit Field - Description

----------------------
0 - Local
1 - Remote
2 - Communication
When LOCAL Selected
-------------------------
Mode- Display/ 5 - Local Only
Local/Remote/ 40167 0 4095 1 - 2 6 - Remote Only
Comm When REMOTE Selected
-----------------------------
Remote Start1 (In case of RDOL show
Start1 & Start2)
7 - Local Only
8 - Remote Only
Remote Start2
(In case of RDOL show Start3 & Start4)

MEMORY MAPS
Range of data Scale

Modbus Size in
Address Bytes
Min Max (SF)
9 - Local Only
10 - Remote Only
When COMMUNICATION Selected
---------------------------------
11 - Local Only
12 - Remote Only
External CT settings
Ratio 40168 1 10000 10 - 2 -
Primary Current 40169 1 10000 1 - 2 -
Secondary Current 40170 1 5 1 - 2 Setting must be 1 or 5
Mode 40171 0 1 1 - 2 0=Disable / 1=Enable
EventPickup (EP): 1
(Bit 0) Bit 0 - 0 = Disable/
EventTrip (ET): 1 1 = Enable
(Bit 1) Bit 1 - 0 = Disable/
EventAlarm (EA): 1 ES = 0 ES = 1 1 = Enable
(Bit 2) ET = 0 ET = 1 Bit 2 - 0 = Disable/
Reserved: 5 EA = 0 EA = 1 1 = Enable
40172 - - 2
Auto Start Detect AS = 0 AS = 1 Bit 8 - 0 = Disable/
(AS): 1 (Bit 8) VAS = 0 VAS = 1 1 = Enable
Voltage Auto Stop CAS = 0 CAS = 1 Bit 9 - 0 = Disable/
(VAS): 1 (Bit 9) 1 = Enable
Current Auto Stop Bit 10 - 0 = Disable/
(CAS): 1 (Bit 10) 1 = Enable
Reserved1: 5
Motor Tag
- Characters allowed are A-Z, a-z, 0-9

40173 - - - 2
and Special chars: #, - , _ , . , ' & space
(Hex values will be shown at register
40174 - - - - 2 address).
For e.g. if Motor Tag is 1234567890
then Address 40173 will show 3231,
Max 10 Ascii Char
40175 - - - - 2 40174 = 3433, 40175 = 3635,
wide Motor Tag
40176 = 3837 & 40177 = 3039
User can select maximum of 10
40176 - - - - 2 Characters Motor tag number.
If Motor Tag is of less than 10 chars,
special char space (Hex 20) will be
40177 - - - - 2 added for remaining characters.

MEMORY MAPS
Range of data Scale

Modbus Size in
Address Bytes
Min Max (SF)
Communication Settings Address (40191 - 40213)
Modbus
Mode 40191 1 2 - - 2 1 = RTU
Node Address 40192 1 247 - - 2 1 to 247
0 = 9600
Baud Rate 40193 0 1 - - 2
1 =19200
0 = No parity
Parity 40194 0 2 - - 2 1 = Even Parity
2 = Odd Parity
0 = 1 Stop bit
Stop Bits 40195 0 1 - - 2
1 = 2 Stop bits
Modbus
0 = MODBUS
Mode 40196 0 2 - - 2 1 = Profibus
2 = Ethernet
Manual Address 01 - 125

Node Address 40197 1 126 - - 2
Auto Address = 126
Ethernet
Bit 0
Mode: DHCP: 1(Bit 0)
0 -Disable / 1 - Enable
Time Zone Sign: 1(Bit 1) 40203 0 1 - - 2
Bit 1
Reserved: (Bit 2 to Bit 15)
0 = '-' / 1 = '1
4294967
IP Address 40204 0 - - 4
296
4294967 e.g if Address is

Subnet Mask 40206 0 - - 4
296 192(0xCO).168(0x78).120(0xA8).
105(0x69)
4294967 then value will be
Default Gateway 40208 0 - - 4
296 0x69A878C0 = 1772648640
4294967
SNTP Server Address 40210 0 - - 4
296
Time Zone GMT

Hour: 8 (Bit 0-7)
Time Zone GMT Min: 4294967 Hrs = 0 to 13
40212 0 - - 4
8 (Bit 8-15) 296 Min = 0 to 59
Reserved: (Bit 16
to bit 31)

MEMORY MAPS
Range of data Scale

Modbus Size in
Address Bytes
Min Max (SF)
DIO Settings Address (40231 - 40282)
Input 1
Bit 0 - Reset
Bit 1- Start 1
Bit 2 - Start 2
Bit 3 - Stop
Bit 4 - Local/Remote
(0 - Local and 1 - Remote)
Bit 5 - Interlock 1
Bit 6 - Interlock 2
Mode- Display/
Bit 7 - Interlock 3
Local/Remote/ 40231 1 8192 1 - 2
Bit 8 - ESTOP
Comm
Bit 9 -Contactor Feedback
Bit 10 - Start 3
Bit 11 - Start 4
Bit 12 - Test
Bit 13 - None
========
1 - Enable
0 - Disable
Validation Period 40232 5 3000 50 Sec 2 -
0 = Disable
1 = Alarm
2 = Trip and Trip Delay
3 = Interlock 1
4 = Interlock 2
Interlock Config 40233 1 1024 1 - 2 5 = Interlock 3
6 = Local Reset
7 = Communication Reset
8 = Auto Reset
9 = Remote Reset
10 = STOP
Interlock Trip Delay Bit 0 - 7 Note: This

(ITD) (Bit 0 -7) should be updated if
Modes of Reset: user selects interlock
ITD = 1 ITD = 100 ITD = 10
Local/Manual (MRL) type as trip
MRL = 0 MRL = 1 MRL = 1
(Bit - 8) Bit 8/9/10/11 - 0 =
MRR = 0 MRR = 1 MRR = 1 ITD
Modes of Reset: Disable/1 = Enable
40234 MRC = 0 MRC = 1 MRC = 1 in 2
Remote (MRR) Note: This should be
MRA = 0 MRA = 1 MRA = 1 Sec
(Bit - 9) updated if user
TI = 0 TI = 1 TI = 1
Modes of Reset: selects interlock type
MM = 0 MM = 1 MM = 1
Communication/ as trip
Serial (MRC) Bit 12/13 - 0 =
(Bit - 10) Disable/1 = Enable

MEMORY MAPS
Range of data Scale

Modbus Size in
Address Bytes
Min Max (SF)
Modes of Reset: Note: This should be

Auto (MRA) (Bit - 11) updated if user
Test Input (TI) selects interlock type
(Bit - 12) as STOP otherwise
Maintained Mode must be Load Default
(MM) (Bit - 13) Value 0
Input 2
Bit 0 - Reset
Bit 1- Start 1
Bit 2 - Start 2
Bit 3 - Stop
Bit 5 - Interlock 1
Bit 6 - Interlock 2
Bit 7 - Interlock 3
Type of Input 40235 1 8192 1 - 2
Bit 8 - ESTOP
Bit 10 - Start 3
Bit 11 - Start 4
Bit 12 - Test
Bit 13 - None
========
1 - Enable
0 - Disable
0 = Disable
1 = Alarm
3 = Interlock 1
4 = Interlock 2
6 = Local Reset
8 = Auto Reset
9 = Remote Reset
10 = STOP
Interlock Trip Delay

ITD = 1 ITD = 100 ITD = 10
(ITD) (Bit 0 -7) Bit 0 - 7 Note: This
MRL = 0 MRL = 1 MRL = 1
Modes of Reset: should be updated if
Local/Manual (MRL) user selects interlock
40238 MRC = 0 MRC = 1 MRC = 1 in 2
(Bit - 8) type as trip
Modes of Reset: Bit 8/9/10/11 - 0 =
TI = 0 TI = 1 TI = 1
Remote (MRR) Disable/1 = Enable
MM = 0 MM = 1 MM = 1
(Bit - 9)

MEMORY MAPS
Range of data Scale

Modbus Size in
Address Bytes
Min Max (SF)
Note: This should be

Modes of Reset: updated if user
Communication/ selects interlock type
Serial (MRC) as trip
(Bit - 10) Bit 12/13 - 0 =
Auto (MRA) (Bit - 11) Note: This should be
Test Input (TI) updated if user
(Bit - 12) selects interlock type
Maintained Mode as STOP otherwise
(MM) (Bit - 13) must be Load Default
Value 0
Input 3
Bit 0 - Reset
Bit 1- Start 1
Bit 2 - Start 2
Bit 3 - Stop
Bit 5 - Interlock 1
Bit 6 - Interlock 2
Bit 7 - Interlock 3
Type of Input 40239 1 8192 1 - 2
Bit 8 - ESTOP
Bit 10 - Start 3
Bit 11 - Start 4
Bit 12 - Test
Bit 13 - None
========
1 - Enable
0 - Disable
0 = Disable
1 = Alarm
3 = Interlock 1
4 = Interlock 2
6 = Local Reset
8 = Auto Reset
9 = Remote Reset
10 = STOP

MEMORY MAPS
Range of data Scale

Modbus Size in
Address Bytes
Min Max (SF)

(Bit - 8) Bit 8/9/10/11 - 0 =
ITD = 1 ITD = 100 ITD = 10
MRL = 0 MRL = 1 MRL = 1
40242 MRC = 0 MRC = 1 MRC = 1 in 2
TI = 0 TI = 1 TI = 1
MM = 0 MM = 1 MM = 1
Input 4
Bit 0 - Reset
Bit 1- Start 1
Bit 2 - Start 2
Bit 3 - Stop
Bit 5 - Interlock 1
Bit 6 - Interlock 2
Bit 7 - Interlock 3
Type of Input 40243 1 8192 1 - 2
Bit 8 - ESTOP
Bit 10 - Start 3
Bit 11 - Start 4
Bit 12 - Test
Bit 13 - None
========
1 - Enable
0 - Disable
0 = Disable
1 = Alarm
3 = Interlock 1
4 = Interlock 2
6 = Local Reset
8 = Auto Reset
9 = Remote Reset
10 = STOP

MEMORY MAPS
Range of data Scale

Modbus Size in
Address Bytes
Min Max (SF)

(Bit - 8) Bit 8/9/10/11 - 0 =
ITD = 1 ITD = 100 ITD = 10
MRL = 0 MRL = 1 MRL = 1
40246 MRC = 0 MRC = 1 MRC = 1 in 2
TI = 0 TI = 1 TI = 1
MM = 0 MM = 1 MM = 1
Input 5
Bit 0 - Reset
Bit 1- Start 1
Bit 2 - Start 2
Bit 3 - Stop
Bit 5 - Interlock 1
Bit 6 - Interlock 2
Bit 7 - Interlock 3
Type of Input 40247 1 8192 1 - 2
Bit 8 - ESTOP
Bit 10 - Start 3
Bit 11 - Start 4
Bit 12 - Test
Bit 13 - None
========
1 - Enable
0 - Disable
0 = Disable
1 = Alarm
3 = Interlock 1
4 = Interlock 2
6 = Local Reset
8 = Auto Reset
9 = Remote Reset
10 = STOP

MEMORY MAPS
Range of data Scale

Modbus Size in
Address Bytes
Min Max (SF)

(Bit - 8) Bit 8/9/10/11 - 0 =
ITD = 1 ITD = 100 ITD = 10
MRL = 0 MRL = 1 MRL = 1
40250 MRC = 0 MRC = 1 MRC = 1 in 2
TI = 0 TI = 1 TI = 1
MM = 0 MM = 1 MM = 1
Input 6
Bit 0 - Reset
Bit 1- Start 1
Bit 2 - Start 2
Bit 3 - Stop
Bit 5 - Interlock 1
Bit 6 - Interlock 2
Bit 7 - Interlock 3
Type of Input 40251 1 8192 1 - 2
Bit 8 - ESTOP
Bit 10 - Start 3
Bit 11 - Start 4
Bit 12 - Test
Bit 13 - None
========
1 - Enable
0 - Disable
0 = Disable
1 = Alarm
3 = Interlock 1
4 = Interlock 2
6 = Local Reset
8 = Auto Reset
9 = Remote Reset
10 = STOP

MEMORY MAPS
Range of data Scale

Modbus Size in
Address Bytes
Min Max (SF)

(Bit - 8) Bit 8/9/10/11 - 0 =
ITD = 1 ITD = 100 ITD = 10
MRL = 0 MRL = 1 MRL = 1
40254 MRC = 0 MRC = 1 MRC = 1 in 2
TI = 0 TI = 1 TI = 1
MM = 0 MM = 1 MM = 1
Output 1
Bit 0 - Alarm
Bit 1 - Interlock 1
Bit 2 - Interlock 2
Bit 3 - Interlock 3
Bit 4 - Follow 1
Bit 5 - Follow 2
Bit 6 - RUN
Bit 7 - RDOL-Forward Relay
Type of Output 40255 1 16384 1 - 4
Bit 8 - RDOL-Reverse Relay
Bit 9 - Star
Bit 10 - Delta
Bit 11 - Trip
Bit 12 - Main
Bit 13 - Drive Available
=====
1 - Enable/0 - Disable
Mode (Level/Pulse) 40257 0 1 1 - 2 0 = Level /1 =Pulse
Hold Time 40258 5 50000 50 Sec 2 Only used if mode is pulse
Time Delay for Follow Relay 40259 5 50000 50 Sec 2 -
Output 2
Bit 0 - Alarm
Bit 1 - Interlock 1
Bit 2 - Interlock 2
Type of Output 40260 1 16384 1 - 4 Bit 3 - Interlock 3
Bit 4 - Follow 1
Bit 5 - Follow 2
Bit 6 - RUN

MEMORY MAPS
Range of data Scale

Modbus Size in
Address Bytes
Min Max (SF)

Bit 9 - Star
Bit 10 - Delta
Bit 11 - Trip
Bit 12 - Main
=====
Output 3
Bit 0 - Alarm
Bit 1 - Interlock 1
Bit 2 - Interlock 2
Bit 3 - Interlock 3
Bit 4 - Follow 1
Bit 5 - Follow 2
Bit 6 - RUN
Type of Output 40265 1 16384 1 - 4
Bit 9 - Star
Bit 10 - Delta
Bit 11 - Trip
Bit 12 - Main
=====
Output 4
Bit 0 - Alarm
Bit 1 - Interlock 1
Type of Output 40270 1 16384 1 - 4 Bit 2 - Interlock 2
Bit 3 - Interlock 3
Bit 4 - Follow 1

MEMORY MAPS
Range of data Scale

Modbus Size in
Address Bytes
Min Max (SF)
Bit 5 - Follow 2
Bit 6 - RUN
Bit 9 - Star
Bit 10 - Delta
Bit 11 - Trip
Bit 12 - Main
=====
Analog Output
0 - Ir
1 - Iy
2 - Ib
3 - Iavg
4 - Vr
5 - Vy
6 - Vb
7 - Vavg
Type of Input 40275 0 15 1 - 2
8 - Vry
9 - Vyb
10 - Vbr
11 - Apparent Power
12 - Reactive Power
13 - Active Power
14 - Temperature
15 - Frequency
Current (Ir, Iy, Ib, Iavg)= 0

Voltage (Vr,Vy,Vb,Vavg,
Vry, Vyb, Vbr) = 0
<Min Power (Apparent,
Min 40276 0 1 - 4
Value Reactive, Active) = 0
Temperature = 0
Frequency = 0
Current (Ir, Iy,Ib, Iavg) = 3600

Voltage (Vr,Vy,Vb,Vavg) = 375
Line Voltage (Vry, Vyb,Vbr) = 650
>Min
Max 40278 3600 10 - 4 Power (Apparent,
Value
Reactive, Active) =28.3
Temperature = 200
Frequency = 75

MEMORY MAPS
Range of data Scale

Modbus Size in
Address Bytes
Min Max (SF)
0 = Factory Set
Scale Factor 40280 0 1 1 - 2
1 = Manual
Expected Output 40281 4 20 10 mA 2 -
Actual Output 40282 1 24 10 mA 2 -
Real Time Clock Data Address (40501 - 40506)
Sec 40501 0 59 - Sec 2 -
Min 40502 0 59 - Min 2 -
Hours 40503 0 23 - - 2 -
Date 40504 1 31 - - 2 -
Month 40505 1 12 - - 2 -
Year 40506 0 99 - - 2 -
rmware version.

ANNEXURE B - APPLICATION NOTES
Overview One Digital Input to be selected as START1.
The Relay supports three communication protocols as Modbus One Digital Output to be selected as RUN.
serial, Pro bus DP and Modbus over TCP/IP. The memory map for Figure B 1 shows the DOL starter wiring diagram. The
all these communication protocols is described below. connections in the diagram are shown considering 3P-4W system.
The connection may be different for different type of system
selection.
A] Modbus RTU Memory Map
When the Relay receives START1 input, RUN output picks up after
DOL Starter
validating all the start inhibit conditions (Refer Inhibit Status in
This is the simplest and widely used type of starter. The selection chapter Testing and Troubleshooting). When the RUN output is
of a DOL starter is based on the rating of the motor. activated, the contactor picks up, which starts the Motor. When a
Basic settings required in the Relay for DOL starter: STOP command is received by the Relay, RUN output drops out,
contactor drops out and the motor stops.
Starter type to be selected as DOL.
R
Y
B
N
SFU / MCCB
FUSE L/+
N/-
1 2 3 4 71 72
2 4 6 N B Y R N/- L/+
CONTACTOR
1 3 5 START
82
61 Dl1
83
DIGITAL INPUTS
STOP 62 Dl2
63 Dl3 81
RESET 64 Dl4 85 CONTACTOR COIL
65 Dl5 86
66 Dl6 84
67 COM 88
89
R Y B 87
91 TRIP INDICATION
92
CBCT
CM UNIT 90
PWR/COMM
S1 MOTOR STATUS
S2 ALARM/PICKUP
R Y B RTD/PTC ANALOG O/P RS485 L
RST ENT
4-20mA OUTPUT
TO FIELD AMMETER
RTD/PTC
Figure B-1: DOL Starter Wiring Diagram

APPLICATION NOTES
RDOL Starter When the Relay receives START1(forward start) input, FORWARD
RELAY output picks up after validating all the start inhibit
This type of starter is used when the motor is required to run in
conditions. When the FORWARD RELAY output is activated, the
both forward as well as reverse directions depending upon the
contactor A picks up starting the Motor in forward direction.
application.
When the Relay receives START2(reverse start) input, REVERSE
Basic settings required in the Relay for RDOL starter: RELAY output picks up after validating all the start inhibit
Starter type to be selected as RDOL. conditions. When the REVERSE RELAY output is activated, the
contactor B picks up starting the Motor in reverse direction. When
One Digital Input to be selected as START1. a STOP command is received by the Relay, FORWARD
One Digital Input to be selected as START2. RELAY/REVERSE RELAY output drops out, corresponding
contactor drops out and the motor stops.
One Digital Output to be selected as FORWARD RELAY.
When motor is running in forward direction and Relay receives
One Digital Output to be selected as REVERSE RELAY.
START2 input, it will ignore the command and will continue to run
Figure B-2 shows the RDOL starter wiring diagram. The in forward direction. When motor is running in reverse direction
connections in the diagram are shown considering 3P-4W system. and Relay receives START1 input, it will ignore the command and
The connection may be different for different type of system will continue to run in reverse direction.
selection.
R
Y
B
N
SFU / MCCB
FUSE L/+
N/-
1 2 3 4 71 72
2 4 6 2 4 6 N B Y R N/- L/+
1 3 5 1 3 5
START1 82
61 Dl1
START2 83
DIGITAL INPUTS
CONTACTOR A CONTACTOR B 62 Dl2

63 Dl3 81
STOP
64 Dl4 85 CONTACTOR COIL
RESET 65 Dl5 86
66 Dl6 84
67 COM 88
89
R Y B 87
91 TRIP INDICATION
92
CBCT
CM UNIT 90
PWR/COMM
S1 MOTOR STATUS
S2 ALARM/PICKUP
R Y B RTD/PTC ANALOG O/P RS485 L
RST ENT
4-20mA OUTPUT
TO FIELD AMMETER
RTD/PTC
Figure B-2: RDOL Starter Wiring Diagram

APPLICATION NOTES
STAR/DELTA Starter Figure B-3 shows the Star-delta wiring diagram. The connections
in the diagram are shown considering 3P-4W system. The
This type of starter provides two types of connections, Star and
connection may be different for different type of system selection.
Delta. During starting time, the star connection reduces the high
starting current and then automatically switches to delta after set When the Relay receives START1 input, MAIN and STAR output
time in star setting. picks up after validating all the start inhibit conditions. Also the
'time in star' timer starts. When the MAIN and STAR output is
Basic settings required in the Relay for STAR-DELTA starter:
activated, the contactor A and contactor C picks up starting the
Starter type to be selected as STAR-DELTA. Motor in reduced voltage condition. The 'time in star' timer
Time in Star setting to be set as per requirement. expires and STAR output drops out, dropping contactor C. The
DELTA output picks up after the set 'change over delay' timer
Star-Delta change over delay setting to be set as per expires. When the DELTA output is activated, the contactor B
requirement. picks up and motor comes in running condition. When a STOP
One Digital Input to be selected as START1. command is received by the Relay, MAIN and DELTA outputs drop
out, corresponding contactors drop out and the motor stops.
One Digital Output to be selected as MAIN.
The MAIN output remains in pick up condition during change
One Digital Output to be selected as STAR.
over between STAR to DELTA.
One Digital Output to be selected as DELTA.
R
Y
B
N
SFU / MCCB
FUSE L/+
N/-
1 2 3 4 71 72
N B Y R N/- L/+
R Y B
START
82
CBCT
61 Dl1
CM UNIT 83
DIGITAL INPUTS
62 Dl2
STOP
63 Dl3 81
CONTACTOR A COIL (MAIN)
S1 RESET 64 Dl4 85
65 Dl5 86
S2 66 Dl6 84
67 COM 88 CONTACTOR B COIL (STAR)
89
CONTACTOR A CONTACTOR B 87
CONTACTOR C 91 CONTACTOR C COIL (DELTA)
2 4 6 2 4 6 2 4 6 92
90
PWR/COMM
1 3 5 1 3 5 1 3 5
MOTOR STATUS
R1 Y1 B1 R2 Y2 B2
ALARM/PICKUP
RTD/PTC ANALOG O/P RS485 L
RST ENT
4-20mA OUTPUT
TO FIELD AMMETER
RTD/PTC
Figure B-3: STAR/DELTA Starter Wiring Diagram

APPLICATION NOTES
B] Non Motor Load Application voltage/no voltage condition.
The MCOMP relay is suitable for non-motor load application as Conventionally two aux contacts, 1ON delay and 1 OFF delay
well. The application can be of heater feeder or MCCB feeder timer per feeder is required to implement the reacceleration
used in case of lighting load etc. scheme which causes the increase in module size, increase in cost
and reduction in reliability as the number of dependent
For such applications, one should correctly set the Feeder type
component increases.
in System setting as Non-Motor .
The MCOMP relay provides the re-acceleration function as an
Certain protections and related functions (alarm, trip, inhibit) are
inbuilt feature with no need of any additional aux contacts and
not available in case of Non-Motor application which are as
external timer.
follows:
The two cases in Re-acceleration supported by MCOMP are as
1. Thermal Overload
follows:
2. Locked Rotor
3. Current Unbalance
1. Motor Re-acceleration function:
4. Phase Loss
Voltage restores within 200 ms from the last voltage dip or
5. Phase Reversal no-voltage condition: If there is a sudden voltage dip in the
6. Under Current power source for a duration of less than 200 ms then the motor
should continue to run without any interruption. The output
7. Maximum number of starts contact of the Relay holds the contacts for 200 ms. The motor will
8. Excessive Start Time continue to run when voltage restores within 200 ms from the
last voltage dip or no-voltage condition.
9. All voltage based protections and functions
Whenever there is an attempt to change in this Feeder type
setting (in case of drive is running or not running), the relay and 2. Motor Re-start function:
display unit needs to be power recycled for successful intended Voltage restores after 200 ms from last voltage dip or no-
operation. voltage condition: If the voltage dip persists for more than 200
ms, then the motor will stop. In this case, if voltage is restored
within the restart time, then voltage will be validated for restart
C] Re-acceleration Application delay time. If the restored voltage persists for the set restart delay,
Re-acceleration is a method where the Relay restarts the motor then the motor will restart. However, if the motor is tripped due to
automatically without user intervention for momentary voltage UV fault during voltage dip condition, then after healthy
dips. The re-acceleration or motor restart function plays very restoration of voltage, the trip will be reset and the motor will be
important role in industries where the critical motor needs to be restarted. Table 6 16 lists the Re-acceleration Protection settings
restarted immediately (or with some delay) without manual available in the Relay.
intervention in case of process interruption due to under-
Parameter Setting range Description
Motor Voltage should go below/equal to this

Voltage Dip 20 to 90 % of VN
threshold value to sense as valid voltage dip
Motor Voltage should restore higher than or
Voltage Restoration 60 to 95 % of VN equal to this set value to sense as valid
voltage recovery
Time for which relay will wait for voltage

Restart Time 0.2 to 60 sec
restoration
Validation time (healthy voltage should sustain
Restart Delay 4 to 1200 sec for this much period) before actual starting the
motor after successful voltage recovery
Letting know the MCOMP relay if the auxiliary

Aux and Motor Supply Same and Separate supply for it is from the same 3 phase motor
supply bus or it is from separate source
Mode Enable or Disable To enable or disable motor restart function
Table B-1: Re-acceleration Protection Settings

APPLICATION NOTES
After healthy restoration of the voltage if all the critical motors D] 3P-3W, 3P-4W Application
gets restarted at the same time, there may be a chance that the
The MCOMP relay can be con gured as per the system voltage
incoming feeder will again see a power deep and trips on under-
availability. There is a setting available as Input Voltage in
voltage. To avoid this situation, one should group the critical
System Setting for selection of system voltage as 3P-3W or 3P-
motors with different priorities. The highest priority motor group
4W. In case of 3P-3W, R-Y-B voltage needs to be connected to the
should start rst and should have same restart delay settings. The
relay voltage terminals with 1st terminal of the relay required to
next priority motor group should then start and should have
be body or panel earthed. In case of 3P-4W, R-Y-B-N voltage
restart delay setting higher than restart delay setting of
needs to be connected to relay voltage terminals.
highest priority motor group. The wide range of restart delay
setting present in the relay will allow the user to con gure for the In case of 3P-3W, VN = VL-L and
staggered starting of the motors and thereby ful lling the in case of 3P-4W, VN = VL-L / 3,
requirement.
where VL-L = Line to line voltage or Motor Rated Voltage and
Note: Motor must be in running condition before voltage dip/no- VN = Nominal voltage used in the relay for protections.
voltage condition occurs.
All the voltage based protection is dependent on VN and hence
proper selection of input voltage is necessary for the required
Presence of any maintained stop command at the time of restart function.
command from the Relay will inhibit starting of the motor.
3P-4W CONNECTION 3P-3W CONNECTION
R R
Y Y
B B
N
SFU/MCCB SFU/MCCB
FUSE FUSE
EARTH
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
N B Y R N B Y R
3-PH.VOLTAGE 3-PH.VOLTAGE
Figure B-5: 3P-3W, 3P-4W Connection Diagram

APPLICATION NOTES
E] Two Phase Voltage Inputs (R and Y phase input) Conventionally a separate winding heating contact with delay
Application timer is required to ful ll the requirement.
In certain applications where due to space constraint only two The relay provides a dedicated output called heater output for
phase inputs are required to be connected to the relay for voltage energizing the winding heating coil present in the feeder and
metering and protections, the MCOMP relay comes as an gives the setting of time delay as heater delay from 1 3600
intelligent option. sec in Digital output setting section. This eliminates the need of
extra timer required in the feeder to achieve the winding heating
There is a setting available in the relay as Phase Selection in
requirement in a compact scheme.
System Setting for the same. When selected as two phase, there
is no need to connect the third voltage phase to the relay and Refer digital output settings present in chapter 9 Settings for
relay will calculate the same internally. con guration of heater output of this application.
2 PHASE INPUT CONNECTION G] Analog Output Application

Analog meters are generally used for remote metering. In a eld
R
where motor is present, the operator comes to know the current
Y
drawn by the motor during running condition (or any other
intended parameter such as availability of healthy three phase
voltage before motor starting) with the help of analog meters.
This meter accept the input in form of 4-20 mA current and
SFU/MCCB provides the corresponding equivalent analog scale depending on
the selected parameter.
Conventionally a separate transducer along with CT is required to
provide the 4 20 mA signal corresponding to one of the three
phase current. This increases the space requirement of the motor
EARTH feeder, cost and reduces the reliability. The required 4-20 mA
signal can be generated from MCOMP as an analog output and
1 2 3 4
can be directly wired to analog meter for metering. One user
N B Y R con gurable 4-20 mA analog output is provided in the Relay
3-PH.VOLTAGE which can be con gured to any of the parameter such as R/Y/B
phase current, R/Y/B phase voltage, power, frequency etc. The
relay terminals for wiring analog output are AO1 and AO2. It is
necessary to know the loading requirement of the device for
proper operation of the relay.
Maximum Burden (load) the MCOMP relay can see without
affecting its output current of 4-20mA is 100 ohm. So the total
burden on MCOMP should be less than 100 ohm on analog
output channels for intended functionality of MCOMP analog
output section. If the burden exceeds 100 ohm, variation in
output current can be observed.
Figure B-6: Two Phase Input Connection For calculating maximum length of wire which can be connected
from analog meter present in eld (or from DCS) to the relay
without affecting its output (4-20mA), one needs to know
The terminal number 1 of the relay needs to be connected to
resistivity of the wire and cross sectional area of the wire used.
clean earth for intended operation of the relay in case two phase
The consideration of LCS meter (Analog meter) burden or DCS
is selected in setting. While selection is on three phase, one needs
terminal burden in the calculation is important for proper
to necessarily follow the connections as mentioned in 3P-3W or in
functioning.
3P-4W cases.
Here is the example for length calculation for copper wire having
resistivity of 1.72E-08 m and considering area of 2.5E-06 sq.m.
F] Winding Heating Application For 500 meter length of wire, using the standard formula of
resistivity (R = L/A where, R=resistance, = resistivity,
In small motors (typically < 30kW) when the motors are in off
L=length, A=area), the burden offer from wire comes to be 3.44
condition for a very long duration and the moisture content in the
ohm. Considering the approximate burden of 20 ohm of Analog
environment is high, it is necessary to keep the motor winding
meter (or DCS terminal), the total burden comes out to be 20 +
warm to have proper starting of the motor during next start.
3.44 = 23.44 Ohm which is less than 100 ohm (MCOMP burden
Generally 24VAC supply is provided in two windings of the motor
handle capacity).
to achieve this with some delay after motor gets stopped.

APPLICATION NOTES
The relay s analog output will continue to provide correct 4-20mA Note: DCS burden considered for calculations is just an assumption.
signal as long as total external burden is less than 100 ohm. User should consider actual values for the calculations.
H] Pro bus Communication Application

Basic info regarding Pro bus protocol:
Parameter Specification of Profibus DP RS 485
Media Copper or Fiber

Transmission Rate 9.6 kbps to 12 mbps
Topology Line topology with termination
Number of nodes Up to 32 nodes per segment (including master, Redundancy module, slave devices, repeaters)
Max total 126 per network (including master, Redundancy module, slave devices, repeaters)
Number of repeaters Max 9 with signal refreshing
Profibus Cable Twisted, shielded two-wire cable, cable type A
Table B-2: Pro bus speci cation
As per standard, Segment 1 => Master to R1

Maximum number of nodes in a segment = 32 Segment 2 => R1 to R2
Maximum number of nodes in a loop = 126 Loop => Master to R2
Figure B-7: Typical pro bus loop connection

APPLICATION NOTES
General Calculation for nding number of slaves which can An application of a repeater is shown in below gure
be connected in a single loop:
Within a segment all PROFIBUS masters, slaves, repeaters, optical Repeater extending Repeater for
the transmission path segmenting
link modules etc. count towards the 32-device limit. This means,
for example, that when two repeaters are connected to a
segment the maximum number of PROFIBUS stations is reduced
to 30. It is good practice to leave at least 10% spare capacity per
segment for future expansion and one for diagnostic tool etc.
Figure B-8: Repeater

Pre-requisites for calculation:
Transmission rate The standard says that a maximum of 9 repeaters may be used
between any master and slave station. However many repeaters
Number of data bytes expected from each slave = A exhibit an increased delay, meaning a maximum of only 4
Master s(PLC/DCS) IO byte handling capability = B repeaters giving 5 in-line segments is recommended practically.
This implies a maximum of 5 in-line segments from a master to
Redundancy module s IO byte handling capability (if present in
the furthest slave. It is strictly recommended to use the repeaters
the network) = C
of same make in a single loop.
Repeater use permissible?
The repeater location is based on below two conditions. The
repeaters can be placed anywhere as long as below two
conditions are ful lled:
Calculation:
Each segment generated by using repeater should have
Select the lowest Input/Output byte handling capability
maximum 32 numbers of nodes (including repeater) as per
number from B & C .
standard.
Divide that number by A . (D=B/A or D=C/A)
Each segment length should be less than the standard
The value of D indicates the maximum number of slaves segment length of selected transmission rate.
which can be ef ciently handled by the master through
Redundancy module and can be connected in a single loop.
Now if value of Pro bus Cabling and Installation:
D < 26 then repeater is not required. General Guidelines:
26 < D < 28 then Repeater may or may not be required. In case of RS485 transmission technology, cable type A should
D > 28 then Use of repeater is mandatory. be used.
So it is recommended to restrict the maximum number of slave When connecting the nodes, ensure that the data cables are
devices (including spares) in a particular segment up to 26. User not mixed up.
may go beyond this as per feasibility study results. To achieve high interference resistance of the system against
electro-magnetic radiation, a shielded data cable (type A is
shielded) should de nitely be used.
Deciding repeater usage in a project:
The shielding is to be connected to the protective ground on
Repeater usage is mandatory if any of the following is true: both sides ensuring good conductivity via large-area shield
Number of devices in a segment (including master, clamps.
Redundancy modules, slave devices) exceeds 32 Equipotential bonding of all connected eld devices is also
Total segment length for desired transmission rate exceeds recommended.
beyond the permissible segment length. Ensure that the data cable is laid as far away from all high
Refer below table for standard segment length for each -current cables as possible and they should not run in parallel
transmission rate. as far as possible. If they need to cross, they should cross at
right angle.
Transmission rate Transmission range per Segment (m)
Stubs must absolutely be avoided.
9.6 kbps to 187.5 kbps 1000 m
The number of nodes which can be connected to a segment is
500 kbps 400 m
limited to 32.
1.5 mbps 200 m
The permissible length of a segment for a selected
3, 6, 12 mbps 100 m
transmission rate should be considered during routing of
Table B-3: Transmission range Pro bus cable.

APPLICATION NOTES
Parameter Specified Limits

Impedance 135..165 with f = 3 .20 MHz
Operational Capacity < 30 pF / m
Loop Resistance < 110 / km
Wire diameter > 0.64 mm
Wire CSA > 0.34 mm2
Construction Shielded, twisted pair
Table B-4: Cable type A Electrical speci cations
Cable Segregation:
Below table shows the distances according to EN 50174-2 that metal isolating segment. Here, it is assumed that a metal partition
must be maintained between PROFIBUS cables (shielded data has the same effect as a cable shield.
cable) and other cables. The table also lists two variants with a
Spacing
Profibus cable and
cable for Without partition or with Partition made out of
Partition made out of Steel
non-metallic partition Aluminum
Signal Transmission
Network signals such as
PROFIBUS.
Digital data signals for PCs,
programming devices, 0 mm 0 mm 0 mm
printers, etc.
Shielded analog inputs or
outputs
Power Supply or 3 phase power

Un-Shielded 200 mm 100 mm 50 mm
Shielded 0 mm 0 mm 0 mm
Table B-5: Cable segregation
Shielding of Pro bus Cable:

As per Pro bus international document (PROFIBUS Installation bonding as close as possible to the PROFIBUS station. For
Guideline for Cabling and Assembly Version 1.0.6 May 2006 electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) reasons you should connect
Order No: 8.022), if no shield connection exists, the shielding of the shield of the PROFIBUS cable to the equipotential bonding
the PROFIBUS cable must be connected to the equipotential system at both ends.
Other shielded
e.g. power supply cables
Field Device
Trunk Cable Drop Cable

Shielding
connection
Junction
Box
Field Device
Drop Cable
equipotential bonding system
safe area explosion hazardous area
Figure B-9: Pro bus cable shielding

APPLICATION NOTES
Several options are available for establishing the large-area 2. Pickup and interference caused by:
connection between the shielding and the equipotential bonding
Laying bus cables too close to electrically noisy power cables or
system. The following gure shows various techniques that can
equipment.
be adapted in the eld. For more information regarding
connection, refer PROFIBUS Installation Guideline for Cabling and Screen current due to earth potential differences between
Assembly Version 1.0.6 May 2006 Order No: 8.022 document. areas of the network.
3. Wiring problems:
Wrong cable used (e.g. using PA cable for DP segments).
Damaged cable (including squashed, over-bent)
Swapped cores at a device (B-RED rule broken)
Un-earthed screen (not connected at every device)
4. Segment rules broken:

Cable too long for the bit rate used.
Figure B-10: Shielding and equipotential bonding system Too many devices (never more than 32 RS-485 drivers on a
segment).
Use of spur lines (keep short at lower bit rates and don t use at
Special requirements for transmission rates >1.5 Mbit/s:
higher bit rates).
Use of bit-rate greater than 1.5 Mbit/s requires special
connectors with built in inductors.
5. Damaged or uncerti ed devices
Spur lines are not allowed when using bit rates greater than
1.5 Mbit/s. Excessive connection capacitance.
The maximum segment length is 100m. Faulty or poor quality RS-485 driver chips
A minimum cable length of 1m is recommended between any

two stations. I] Protection Function Application
Thermal Overload Case Study
Guidelines for redundancy module placement in a switchboard: In MCOMP Relay due to constant asymptotic factor k the thermal
It is always recommended to place a redundancy module at the curve plotted is shifted by 1.15 Times of Iset i.e. If IFLC = 100A,
start of the loop. Iset = 100% (Step Size 5%) the curve starts from 1.15 Time of
IFLC.
In case of more than one redundancy module, it is
recommended to keep all the redundancy modules at one In certain applications thermal Overload Curve calculations
location for easy automation. Starting loop connection of slave should start from 100% of FLC. To achieve the thermal overload
devices for each redundancy module needs to be brought up curve starting at 98% of FLC we have to set Iset at 85% so that
to that single location. the curve starts at 98% of FLC (i.e. 85 * 1.15).
But when user is setting Iset = 85% in thermal overload setting, it
means any current above 85% of FLC is not the normal running
Common Errors in Pro bus communication:
current. However relay will not trip on overload until current goes
1. Termination problems: above 98% of FLC as thermal overload curve starts from 98%.
Lack of terminations at the end of a segment.
Double termination, caused by devices with inbuilt Tripping of Motor on Thermal Overload during Starting
termination. state of the motor:
Termination in the middle of a segment (can be caused by As soon as the motor receives a start command and as per current
devices with inbuilt termination). drawn by the motor, the relay starts accumulating thermal
memory and during starting if the thermal memory/capacity
Unpowered terminations (unplugged or unpowered devices).
reaches 100 % it does not issue a trip command till starting time
Incorrectly wired isolating connectors (only becomes a problem (Start Time Set in Relay) expires. Relay issues a trip command
when switched on). immediately after start time (Start Time Set in Relay) is elapsed on
Thermal Overload Protection.

APPLICATION NOTES
100%
Relay Thermal
Start Time = 10 Sec Curve
98% of FLC
Motor Current
Thermal
Memory = 100% Thermal OL
Protection Trip
Figure B-11: Thermal overload during starting state of the motor
Tripping of Motor on Thermal Overload during Running During running condition if the currents exceeds 98% of FLC the
state of the motor: Thermal Memory start increasing and if the memory reaches 100
% issue a trip command as per the time calculated by the relay.
Relay starts accumulating thermal memory during starting
condition and gets settle as soon as motor is started successfully.
100%
70%
Relay Thermal
Start Time = 10 Sec Curve
98% of FLC
Motor Current
Motor Starting
Motor Running
Thermal OL
Thermal Protection Trip
O/L Pick Up
Thermal Memory
= 100%
Figure B-12: Thermal overload during running state of the motor
Effect on Excessive Start Time Protection due to setting When user is setting Iset = 85%, during Starting MCOMP relay
Iset = 85%: checks if the motor has gone above IFLC and whether it has come
back to 85% of IFLC within the set starting time. If the current
During excessive start time protection, MCOMP relay checks if the
drawn by the motor after starting time has just elapsed is greater
motor has gone above IFLC and comes back to the Iset or less
than 85% of IFLC then MCOMP issues a trip command on
than Iset (will be equal to IFLC in case of Iset=100%) as speci ed
Excessive Start Time Protection.
by the user within the set starting time (i.e. Time Delay Set in
Relay for Starting Time).

APPLICATION NOTES
Locked Rotor Protection Locked rotor during running state of the motor:
MCOMP relay checks if the motor current has gone above the During Running Condition if the measured current is greater than
Locked Rotor Setting in Starting or in Running Condition. The trip the pick-up set value, locked rotor timer gets activated and issues
command will be generated by the relay only after speci ed delay a trip command after the Locked Rotor Timer is elapsed provided
in Lock Rotor Setting; however the relay issues actual trip the locked rotor condition is persisting at the time of tripping.
command as per following:
J] Watchdog Application
Locked rotor during starting state of the motor:
In the unlikely event of internal relay failure, the relay shall
Case a) Locked rotor condition occurs and resets before changeover one of its con gured output contacts so that user can
starting time expires: (i.e. during starting state of the motor and interpret that the relay has failed, thereby corresponding
after start command is issued) corrective or preventive action can be taken. To meet this,
watchdog register is available in MCOMP on Modbus
If the measured current is greater than the set value, locked rotor
communication protocol and as well as in MCOMP COMPlogic
timer gets activated and does not issue a trip command till
input list. This gives the user exibility to con gure the watchdog
starting time expires. If the measured current reduces below
bit in any of the Digital output/COMPlogic modules of the
Locked Rotor Pickup before the start time is elapsed, locked rotor
MCOMP. Following 10 individual watchdog error bits & 1
timer will get reset and trip will not be issued.
common bit obtained by logically OR all 10 watchdog bits is
available in MCOMPs COMP logic input list.
Starting Curve 1. Vref error of R-Phase Current Channel

L.R.
Pickup
2. Vref error of Y-Phase Current Channel
Start Time = 10 Sec
3. Vref error of B-Phase Current Channel
Lock Rotor Trip Lock Rotor Time
Delay Timer Starts Elapsed 4. Vref error of R-Phase Voltage Channel
L.R. Delay
Lock Rotor Pickup 5. Vref error of Y-Phase Voltage Channel
Reset
2 Sec Lock Rotor Plot
6. Vref error of B-Phase Voltage Channel
7. Descriptor Error
Figure B-13: Motor does not trip on locked rotor (Starting state) 8. ADC Failure
9. RTC Failure
Case b) Locked rotor condition occurs and does not reset 10. CM detect error
before starting time expires:
11. Common watchdog bit
If the measured current is greater than the set value, locked rotor
User gets exibility to con gure the individual watchdog bits &
timer gets activated and does not issue a trip command till
the common watchdog bit into COMPlogic modules. These
starting time expires. Relay issues a trip command immediately
complogic modules can be assigned to any of the Digital output
after start time is elapsed if the current doesn t fall below Lock
of MCOMP to achieve intended functionality.
Rotor Pickup. Assumption: Starting Time = 10 Sec / Lock Rotor
Trip Delay = 2 Sec.
Starting Curve
L.R.
Pickup
Start Time = 10 Sec
Lock Rotor Trip Lock Rotor Time Lock Rotor

Delay Timer Starts Elapsed Protection
Tripped
L.R. Delay
2 Sec
Lock Rotor Plot
Motor Trip on Lock Rotor
Figure B-14: Motor tripped on locked rotor (starting state)

APPLICATION NOTES
Error Name Possible error Causes Impact on MCOMP operation
Vref error Internal power supply failure. Metering of corresponding parameter will not be accurate
(for all channel) and can go random. Subsequently the protection
Component damage to long run
operation will be affected.
or end of life.
Vref error will get reset after troubleshooting & repairing.
Temperature drift.
Dry soldering of component short.
Descriptor error High voltage on EEPROM voltage High voltage on voltage supply channel will corrupt the
supply channel. data stored in EEPROM.
Noise on EEPROM data channel. Noise on data channel will write improper data into
EEPROM.
Component damage.
In case of temporary noise or over voltage on supply,
EEPROM memory will be unavailable for reading or writing
settings & settings will reset to default.
In above case EEPROM will become available for normal
operation again after Power recycle & descriptor error will
get reset.
In case of component failure, Descriptor error will get reset
after hardware repairing.
ADC Failure High voltage on ADC channel. Metering will be unde ned and proper protection
operation cannot be guaranteed.
Internal module failure.
RTC Failure RTC battery drained. Thermal overload, Re-acceleration, Max start per hour
calculation fails at power on.
RTC module failure
Time stamp will not be accurate
Repairing will be required for resetting error.
CM Detect Error CT module is not connected. Issues STOP command if Current Auto Stop is enabled.
CT wire is open or CT module If current auto stop is disabled, current based protection
disconnection. will be of ine.
MCOMP Auxiliary power recycling after Reconnecting CT
module cable will reset error.
Table B-6: Cause & e ect matrix for watchdog bits

APPLICATION NOTES
K] Single Phase Motor Application Setting Requirement:
MCOMP relay can be used for protecting single phase motor. Voltage connect setting in system setting needs to be disabled.
There are two ways for connection depending upon the Following protections should be disabled for faithful operation:
requirement as follows:
Current unbalance
1. When only current based protection and metering is
Earth fault
required:
Voltage based protections
Wiring requirement:
Frequency based protections
The single phase (power cable) needs to be passed through R
phase of MCOMP current module. Phase loss
No connection at MCOMP voltage terminals. (Voltage connect Phase reversal

setting should be Disabled in MCOMP relay)
All other control wiring (DI/DO) as per requirement in the Metering Info:
scheme.
Following metering parameters needs to be ignored:
Reference connection diagram for Current Module connection is
shown below. Iy, Ib, Iavg, Ie
Voltage, Frequency, Energy, Power, PF, Phase sequence
parameters
VR VY VB VN
Y B
Current Module Main unit
Figure B-15: Single Phase Motor Application 1

APPLICATION NOTES
2. When current and voltage based protection and Following protections should be disabled for faithful operation:
metering is required:
Current unbalance
Wiring requirement:
Earth fault
The single phase (power cable) needs to be passed through R
Phase Loss
phase of MCOMP current module.
Voltage Unbalance
Phase and Neutral needs to be connected at MCOMP voltage
terminals as shown in below diagram. Frequency based protections
All other control wiring (DI/DO) as per requirement in the Phase Reversal
scheme.
Reference connection diagram for Current Module and Main unit Metering Info:
connection is shown below.
Following metering parameters needs to be ignored:
Iy, Ib, Iavg, Ie
Setting Requirement:
Phase sequence parameters
Voltage connect setting in system setting needs to be enabled.
Neu
Ph
VR VY VB VN
Y B
Current Module Main unit
Figure B-16: Single Phase Motor Application 2

REVISION LOG
Rev Description Released Date

A Description June 2012
Added CE Certi cate and Declaration of Conformity (16 & 17)

Modi ed MCOMP Order Codes (28 - in Introduction)
Modi ed sensing range for Digital Input(31) & added Relay element Communication Failure
(36) in Speci cation
Modi ed Speci cation Labels (41) & added Disposal of the Relay (65) in Installation
Note added for terminal numbers of expandable MCOMP version (11).
Added number of Start Parameter in Monitoring (73 in Metering & Monitoring)
B January 2013
Added Communication Failure Protection (98 - Protection)
Updated Digital Output settings (104), number of Truth Tables (106), and the List of
COMPlogic Inputs (114) in DIO and COMPlogic)
Modi ed Memory Map and GSD modules for Pro bus (from 147 in Communication)
Added Mode change settings, Communication failure settings, Trip only remote setting, etc.
(from 204 in Setting Sheet)
Added Special Commands table, Inhibit Status table, etc (from 305 in Troubleshooting)
Added Application Notes (309)
Brief changes are:

Introduction: added product overview gure, expansion DIO description, modi ed order
codes
Speci cations: added 51P, 51N settings in relay elements, modi ed general speci cations,
corrected minor mistakes in settings
Installation: changed display dimension gure, removed product speci cation label, changed
display mounting gure, changed relay main unit overview gure (terminal numbers
changed), added external CT wiring diagram, removed starter types
Protections: corrected mistakes in overload trip chart, added IDMT over current protection,
C added description in temperature protection Dec 2015
Communication: removed modbus function codes description, memory map moved to
separate annexure
Settings: added system setting parameter description, digital input/output setting parameter
description, modi ed case studies, modi ed setting sheet for new parameters
User Interface: changed display gure
Testing and troubleshooting : added brief testing methodology
Annexure A Memory Maps: Pro bus output bytes changed, added detailed GSD modules
and input list and their description
Annexure B Application notes : Newly added
Table R-1: Revision log

NOTES

NOTES

NOTES

Sales Ofﬁces - India Sales Ofﬁces - International
Bengaluru Australia Oman
TAMCO Electrical Industries Australia Pty P.O.Box 598, Ruwi, Postal Code-112
Bengaluru 560001 Ltd Sultanate of Oman
Tel: 080-25020319 31 Kitchen Road, Dandenong 3175 Tel:+968 98034317
Fax: 080-25596397 Melbourne, Victoria, Australia Mob:+968 98034317
Email: ese-chn@Lntebg.com Tel:+613 9706 7288 EMail: ese-oman@Lntebg.com
Fax:+613 9706 9112
Chennai Email: sales@tamcoaustralia.com.au Qatar
L&T Construction Campus www.tamcoaustralia.com.au
TC-1 Building, II Floor
Mount-Poonamallee Road India Najma Intersection, Opp: Doha Cinema
Manapakkam, Chennai 600 089 L&T Gate NO. 5, L&T Business Park TC -II, C-Ring Road,P.O Box No- 24399
Tel:+91-44-2270 6801 Tower B - 7 th oor, Saki vihar road, Doha, Qatar
Fax:+91-44-2270 6930 Mumbai 400 072 Tel: +974-44-239 000
Email: ese-chn@Lntebg.com Tel:+91-22-6705 2813 Fax: +974-44-551 286
Fax:+91-22-6705 1024 Email: ese-qatar@Lntebg.com
Hyderabad Email: ese-intl@Lntebg.com
Post Bag 12, Vasantha Chambers Saudi Arabia
Indonesia L&T Electricals Saudi Arabia Company
Hyderabad 500 004 PT. TAMCO Indonesia Limited - L. L. C
Tel: +91-40-6672 0210 F-36, Jalan Jababeka Raya MH-4, Plot: 17+19
Fax: +91-40-2324 2356 Jababeka Industrial Estate
Email: ese-hyd@Lntebg.com Cikarang Utara, Bekasi, 17530,Indonesia Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Tel.: +62 21 893 5070 Tel: +966-3-8127708
Kolkata
Fax: +62 21 893 5071 Fax: +966-3-8127780
Post Bag 619
Email: sales@tamco.co.id Email: Ltesa@Lntebg.com
www.tamco.co.id
Kolkata 700 071
Tel. : +91-33-4400 2550 / 2558 Kuwait 2203, 22nd Floor
Fax. : +91-33-22827587 / 1025 Kana Controls General Trading &
Email: ese-kol@Lntebg.com Contracting Co. W.L.L
P.O Box: 25593 Safat, 13116 Abu Dhabi, UAE
Mumbai
Kuwait Tel. : +971-2-676 5988
L&T Gate No. 5, L&T Business Park TC -II,
Tel: +965-2474 1373 Fax. : +971-2-676 6399
Tower B - 7 th oor, Saki Vihar road, Powai
Faxs: +965-2474 1537 Email: ese-uae@Lntebg.com
Mumbai 400 072
Email: ese-kwt@Lntebg.com
Tel:+91-22-6705 3083
Fax:+91-22-6705 1556 Malaysia
Email: ese-intl@Lntebg.com TAMCO SWITCHGEAR (MALAYSIA) SDN
BHD
New Delhi
Sub Lot 24, Lot 16505, Jalan Keluli 1
Post Bag 6223
32, Shivaji Marg
Section 7
New Delhi 110 015
Tel: +91-11-4141 9620/9942
Tel: +603 3361 8200
Fax: +91-11-4141 9625
Fax: +603 3341 6200
Email: ese-del@Lntebg.com
Email: tamco@tamco.com.my
www.tamco.com.my
Radhadaya Complex, J. P. Road
Vadodara 390 015
Tel: +91-265-66136 37/38
Fax: +91-265-2336 184
Email: ese-vad@Lntebg.com
MCOMP23.11.2016
Larsen & Toubro Limited, Electrical Systems & Equipment - Head Of ce Registered Of ce:
7C, TC II, Tower B, Level 7, L&T Gate No. 5, Saki Vihar Road, Powai, Mumbai 400 072. L&T House, N. M. Marg
Tel: +91-22-6705 1748 Fax: +91-22-6705 1556 Ballard Estate
Mumbai 400 001, INDIA
Email: ese-cmt@Lntebg.com Website: www.lntebg.com
The information contained herein is correct at time of printing, but as the products and its manufacturing processes are being developed continuously,
this information is subject to change without notice and the company cannot be held liable for any alleged misinterpretation howsoever arising.

MCOM Commissioning Manual PDF

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Originaltitel

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

MCOM Commissioning Manual PDF

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

Complete Solution for Motor Protection

Complete Solution for Motor Protection

The content of this publication is subject to change

L&T Electrical & Automation

© 2016 Larsen & Toubro Limited. All rights reserved.

MCOMP User Manual - REV. C

MCOMP User Manual - REV. C

5.0 METERING AND MONITORING 37

MCOMP User Manual - REV. C

MCOMP User Manual - REV. C

9.0 USER INTERFACE 119

MCOMP User Manual - REV. C

10.0 TESTING AND TROUBLESHOOTING 150

Memory Maps 156

Application Notes 218

MCOMP User Manual - REV. C

MCOMP User Manual - REV. C 1

Manual Overview Safety and General Information

Purpose of This Manual

MCOMP User Manual - REV. C 2

Following are the different Nomenclature and their descriptions

Table 1-1: Nomenclature and Description

MCOMP User Manual - REV. C 3

RTD Resistance Temperature Detector

Table 1-1: Nomenclature and Description

Suggestions for Improving this Manual

MCOMP User Manual - REV. C 4

MCOMP User Manual - REV. C 5

Condition of Motor Possible Irregularities Action by MCOMP

Table 2-1: Motor Conditions

MCOMP User Manual - REV. C 6

Product Overview processor, input/output board, voltage sensing module and

Relay Main Unit

Expansion Unit Cable

Figure 2.1 Product overview

MCOMP User Manual - REV. C 7

Table 2-2: LED Status Description

Note: X Does not matter

Current Module (CM) Display unit

CM Type IFLC Range Motor Rating for 415V System

Table 2-3: CM Type and Range

MCOMP User Manual - REV. C 8

LED Indications on Expansion unit LED s for DI/DO status:

MCOMP Order Codes

Part number selection MCOMP MAIN UNIT PART NUMBER

O Universal (80 230 V AC/DC)

UI Universal (80 230 V AC/DC)

Voltage sensing for YI 230 V AC/DC

R RTD Input Port

Table 2-4: Main unit order code

Part number selection MCOMP CURRNET MODULE PART NUMBER

CM Type C1 CM Type 1 ( Iflc : 0.6 2 A)

Table 2-5: Current Module order code

MCOMP User Manual - REV. C 9

Auxiliary Voltage D1 Universal (80 230 V AC/DC)

Table 2-6: Display Unit order code

A 4DI/2DO Expansion Unit

Voltage sensing for YI 230 V AC/DC

Table 2-7: Expansion Unit order code

ACCESSORIES/ Part number selection MCOMP LOOSE CABLE PART NUMBER

Cable Type A Display Main unit cable of 0.5 m

Table 2-8: Accessories order code

MCOMP User Manual - REV. C 10